WS Handbook

1
War Studies Commissioning Course Handbook

Written by members of the
Department of War Studies
The Royal Military Academy Sandhurst

Edited by Dr Gregory Fremont-Barnes

Copyright 2013

2

Contents
Why Study Military History? 5
Theories and Concepts of War 7
Introduction to Clausewitzian Thought 8
On War 9
Reception and criticism of Clausewitz: Is Clausewitz still relevant? 17
Questions to provoke your thinking 19
Annex 19
Suggested Reading 23
Total War 24
War Aims 28

Methods of Warfare 28
Mobilisation of society 29
Limited War and Escalation: The Cold War and Beyond 31
The Problem of Hybridity in War 37

The Manoeuvrist Approach 42
The Evolution of Manoeuvre Warfare Theories 43
Manoeuvre Warfare Concepts 50
3

Annexes 56
Glossary of Manoeuvre Warfare terms 71

Coalition and Expeditionary Operations 76
Why embark on a coalition operation? 77
Coalition Operations: Doctrine and Problems of Cohesion and Command 80
Expeditionary Operations 88
Maritime Power Projection 89
Sea Power and Sea Control 90

Amphibious Operations 92
Air Power 93
A British Tradition of Expeditionary Operations? 94
The British Revival of Expeditionary Operations 97
British Coalition and Expeditionary Operations in the 21
st
Century 99
Expeditionary Operations Case Studies 101
Operation Detachment:
The Invasion of Iwo Jima, 19 February-19 March 1945 101

Operation Musketeer:
The Anglo-French Expedition to Egypt, 1956 105

Operation Corporate
Repossession of the Falklands, April-June 1982 111

Operation Palliser:
British intervention in Sierra Leone, 2000 123

Operation TELIC I:
The British invasion of Iraq, March-May 2003 127

Insurgency 131

Introduction 131

Theories 132

4

Limitations 136

The Urban Option 139

Conclusion 141

Early 20
th
century insurgencies 141

The Anglo-Irish War, 1919-21 150

Mao Tse-tung and the Chinese Experience 154

Insurgency and Counterinsurgency to 1945-75 162

Introduction 162

French Counterinsurgency 165

Indochina, 1946-54 165

Algeria, 1954-62 167

The United States and the Vietnam War 174

The Cuban Revolution and the Emergence of Urban Terrorism 178

British Counterinsurgency 185

Insurgency and Counterinsurgency since Vietnam 194

Central America 194

The Soviets in Afghanistan, 1979-89 196

Suggested Reading on Insurgency and Counterinsurgency 205

3

Why Study Military History?

The study of history cannot provide answers to all the questions that a military
commander has to ask. Particularly in the sphere of low-level tactics, new technologies and
weapon systems constantly change and thus impact on the conduct of war. However,
historical examples do provide a framework for these ever-changing realities. For instance,
the impact of battle on the human psyche can be studied as well as its effect on the soldier,
while his combat readiness and general well-being can be explored. Battle-shock occurred in
all wars even though the effects that caused them have altered over time. How did soldiers
and societies deal with these realities? Deeper questions can also be asked: Why has the
proportion of soldiers suffering from post-traumatic stress disorder increased massively over
time? Were societies just ignorant in earlier times or has, for instance, the fact that in western
societies a general perception of threat and an awareness of danger diminished, resulting in
the weakening of the soldiers psyche?
History also shows us that, in order to be successful in war, an army and, in essence, a
state must be victorious within the entire spectrum of war. Being the master of the battlefield
does not necessarily result in overall victory. In the third century B.C. the Carthaginian
general Hannibal was able to win numerous battles against the Romans, but he was not able
to turn these successes into strategic victory. In the end, he was overcome by superior Roman
strategic thought. The same applies to the German army in both world wars. Arguably, the
Germans had the best-trained and most successful fighting organisations in both conflicts.
However, they were not able to turn their superiority on the battlefield and their tactical and
operational abilities into tangible strategic victories. As a consequence, they eventually lost
both world wars.
6

Michael Howard, former Professor of the History of War at Oxford University, said
that if a commander studied military history in width, depth and in context it could provide
him with important and valuable insights into war and its conduct. Even more important,
Howard contended that the study of history does not prepare an officer to conduct the next
battle better, but to make him wise forever.
1

Accordingly, the value of the study of history can be great, but only if this task is
carried out studiously. Otherwise, history loses all its impact, simply providing us with
enough battles, engagements and wars that can basically produce any answer we want them
to provide. The view was supported by the German philosopher of war, Carl von Clausewitz,
who stated that history teaches us powerful lessons for the conduct of war. However, he
argued that if the analysis remains shallow the danger is that the writer pretends he is trying
to prove something, but that he himself has never mastered the events he cites, and that such
superficial, irresponsible handling of history leads to hundreds of wrong ideas and bogus
theorizing.
2

If the pitfalls alluded to above are avoided and the principles of the study of history
applied, this study does not only make us wiser, as Michael Howard has claimed, but it offers
the military leader tangible and valuable hand-rails on which to hold on to as he marches
down the corridors of his own (military) history.

1
Michael Howard, The Use and Abuse of Military History, in, The Causes of Wars and
other essays, London: Temple Smith, 1983, pp. 183-97.
2
Carl von Clausewitz, On War, edited and translated by Michael Howard and Peter Paret,
Princeton: Princeton University Press 1976, p. 173.
7

Suggested Reading

Howard, Michael. The Use and Abuse of Military History, in The Causes of War
and other essays. London: Temple Smith, 1983.
Murray, Williamson and Richard Hart Sinnreich, eds. The Past as Prologue: The
Importance of History to the Military Profession. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 2006.

Theories and Concepts of War

This chapter provides an overview of fundamental thinking about the nature and
conduct of war. Any officer, by dint of being a significant part of the military instrument of
the state, needs to understand the link between national policy and military strategy, the very
nature of war, and, in broad outline, how war is waged. The concepts presented in this
chapter deal with conventional, interstate war rather than internal conflicts such as
insurgencies, but they are applicable beyond the realm of interstate war.
Of the many books written about war and the art of war, most have dealt with very
restricted aspects such as tactics and technology, or, alternatively, general observations
which, however, only had relevance for their time and age. Among those books that still
provide a fundamental understanding of war and the art of war must rank the works of Sun
Tzu, Carl von Clausewitz, and Antoine-Henri de Jomini. Sun Tzu, a famous Chinese general
who lived around 500 BC, offered some general advice about the use of the military
instrument in pursuit of political objectives, but the main contribution of his Art of War
consists of intriguing ideas on the conduct of war, particularly on how numerically inferior
8

forces can defeat larger forces without incurring heavy casualties. Significant traces of his
school of thought can still be found in current British and US doctrine. Jomini (1779-1869), a
staff officer and general under Napoleon, wrote an analysis of Napoleons operational art and
principles of war which is still of interest to the modern military professional.
The bulk of the chapter, however, is devoted to Carl von Clausewitz (1780-1831), a
Prussian general, and his unfinished work, On War. Clausewitzs central position in military
thought is based on his timeless observations on the nature of war, the nexus between war
and politics, and operational concepts such as the centre of gravity and the culminating
point. Clausewitz is widely quoted all over the Western world, and British military doctrine
explicitly draws on his ideas.
3
The strategist Bernard Brodie went so far as to call it not
simply the greatest but the only truly great book on war.
4
The chapter then turns to two
fundamentally different forms of interstate war, namely limited and total war, and, associated
with these phenomena, the concepts of escalation and limitation.

Introduction to Clausewitzian Thought
Clausewitz was born at a time of fundamental historical change. When he was nine
years old, the French Revolution took its course; and when he was 12 years old, he joined a
Prussian infantry regiment as a Junker
5
soon to see action in the war against revolutionary
France. Clausewitz continued to serve for the rest of his life, mostly in staff positions and
senior instructor appointments in the Prussian Army and, for a spell, in the Russian Army.

3
See Annex 3.
4
Bernard Brodie, The Continuing Relevance of On War, in Carl von Clausewitz, On War, edited
and translated by Michael Howard and Peter Paret, Princeton University Press, 1976, p. 53.
5
Comparable to ensign.
9

During this time, he directly witnessed or took part in five campaigns and major battles as
well as numerous minor engagements.
His major work, On War reflects his experience of the French Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Wars (1792-1815) but was also based on a much broader historical analysis. On
War presented a theory of war that was sufficiently general to encompass both the limited
cabinet wars
6
of the 18
th
century and the more total wars of the nation in arms of 1792-
1815.
7
Though some chapters of On War have lost relevance due to technological and social
change, the continued value of the book rests in its fundamental observations on the nature of
war, in particular the link between war and politics.

On War
On War starts with a fundamental question: what is war? Clausewitz understands war
as an extended duel, a clash of opposing wills. Because our will and that of our enemy
clashes our interests are diametrically opposed it is necessary to use force to compel the
enemy to yield to our will. Clausewitz articulates the idea of Absolute War in the earliest
section of his book, arguing that at least in theory (if not in reality) all wars regardless of
the issue(s) for which they are fought should be taken to extremes, and involve the
annihilation of one side by the other. In this sense, war was an apolitical activity, abstracted
from the real world and motivated by the mere existence of a potential opponent, whose
intentions could not be known, but who had to be assumed to be hostile. Only by the total
removal of this threat could ones own security be guaranteed.

6
Cabinet wars: wars waged between princes and kings, by royal armies, usually in pursuit of dynastic
interests.
7
See sections on Limited War and Total War.
10

In the real rather than the abstract world, however, Clausewitz stresses that war
cannot be separated from politics. He emphasises that in reality, the governments will is
expressed in the form of a war aim, a political objective.
8
Put another way, war is part of
political intercourse and therefore has to be understood in its political context. Not only does
war serve a political purpose, continuous political control has to ensure that the war is waged
in a manner that is in keeping with the attainment of its political objective. Further political
considerations, such as the cost of the war in terms of lives and treasure, also influence the
conduct of war. Thus, political considerations permeate the whole planning and conduct of
war.
9
A general may, for instance, be asked to achieve a military victory at a given date, not
because this makes sense militarily, but because this military success can be exploited
politically. Clausewitz summarises the relationship between war and politics in his famous
phrase, War is the continuation of politics with the addition of other means.
10

Clausewitz distinguishes between the political aim in war and the subordinated
military aim in war. If the political aim is to wipe the enemy country off the map, then the
military aim is to render the enemy defenceless. If the political aim is to seize some territory
from the enemy, then the military aim is to exert sufficient military pressure on the enemy to
make him yield.
11

Because political aims can differ considerably in their scope and scale, Clausewitz
distinguishes between two kinds of war. On the one hand, there is war for extreme aims,
which seeks to destroy the enemy as a political entity. Because the war aim is extreme, there
is no scope for negotiations or compromise. Hence, the enemy will have to suffer total defeat,

8
Clausewitz, On War, Book I, Chapter I, pp. 75-89.
9
Ibid., Book VIII, Chapter 6B, p. 605.
10
Ibid., Book VIII, Chapter 6B, p. 605.
11
Ibid., Book I, Chapter 1, pp. 75-89.
11

rendering him utterly defenceless. Total victory requires that the enemys army is incapable
of continuing the war, that the enemys territory is occupied, and that the will of the enemys
government and population is broken. Only if his will has been broken can victory be
considered total, because even a country that is occupied and whose army is destroyed can
still resist by way of popular resistance and guerrilla warfare.
12

On the other hand, there is war for moderate aims such as limited territorial
expansion. Because this war does not threaten the vital interests of the enemy, his willingness
to expend lives and treasure in order to resist us will be limited. We therefore do not need to
achieve total victory. It will be sufficient to get the enemy into such an inferior military
position that giving in to our demands would seem a lesser evil than the continuation of the
war. In other words, we need to exert sufficient pressure on the enemy to bring him to the
negotiating table, where our superior bargaining position will then permit us to achieve our
war aim. This type of war is likely to be characterised by a parallel strategy of fighting and
negotiating.
13

Clausewitz stresses that these two kinds of war are not pure, but part of a continuum.
Thus, war can range in intensity from mere armed observations at the lower end of the
spectrum to wars of annihilation at the higher end of the spectrum. Furthermore, a war may
move within the spectrum during its duration due to escalation and limitation.
14

Because war is a clash of wills and the enemy will resist us, we may need to escalate
our efforts in order to overcome this resistance. Since the enemy is likely to respond in kind,
a process of escalation can take place, which sees the war being waged with increasing effort,

12
13
Ibid., Note of 10 July 1827, p. 69 and Book I, Chapter 1, pp. 87-88; also Book VIII, Chapter 2, pp.
579-581.
14
Ibid., Book I, Chapter 1, p. 81.
12

thus raising costs and risks on both sides. It is also possible that emotions such as hatred and
revenge are aroused during the war emotions which are likely to add to escalation. At the
same time, however, the belligerents may not wish to escalate beyond a point where the costs
of the war would outweigh the expected benefits. Depending on the relative strength of the
escalating and limiting factors in a given war, therefore, some wars will see extreme
escalation, whilst others will be dominated by the desire to limit cost, risk, and effort.
15

Clausewitz cautions that the decision to use war as an instrument of politics in pursuit
of political objectives must not be taken lightly. The national leaders must be clear what the
intended purpose of the war is, and what they need to achieve in military terms in order to
make the attainment of this purpose possible. Planning a war is greatly complicated by the
fact that interaction, chance, and friction make war inherently unpredictable. That is, enemy
actions and intentions are designed to counter our own efforts; the fog of war does not permit
us to see clearly what is on the other side of the hill; chance events such as inclement
weather can frustrate our intentions; and human weakness and fallibility, exacerbated by
danger and hardship, can contribute to military failure. Indeed, there are so many things that
can go wrong in military operations that Clausewitz speaks of war as the realm of chance.
16

Clausewitz summarises his understanding of the fundamental nature of war in his
Remarkable Trinity. He observes that three aspects are always present in war: first, violence,
hatred and enmity, which he compares to blind natural forces; second, probabilities,
uncertainty, and chance, reflecting his dictum that war is the realm of chance; third, the
instrumental nature of war, which is to say its use as an instrument of politics. The three
aspects could be summarised as the rational, the irrational, and the unpredictable tendencies

15
16
13

of war. The character of each individual war is determined by the relative strength of these
three aspects. If, for instance, the peoples or nations in a given war are very passionate, easily
aroused, and full of hatred for the enemy, governments risk being swept along with this
passion and hence the character of the war will be dominated by irrational forces. If, in
contrast, the people are not very interested in the war, the government can do what it
considers sensible, and hence the character of the war will be dominated by rational
considerations and probably a limited war effort. Clausewitz is careful, though, not directly to
link the people to irrationality, the army to chance, and the government to rationality, though
he says that these links exist as a tendency.
17

T
he
Rem
arka
ble
Trini
ty is
usef
ul
beca
use
it
dem

17
!"# %#&'()'*+# !(,-,./
War ls more Lhan a Lrue chameleon LhaL sllghLly adapLs lLs characLerlsLlcs Lo Lhe glven
case. As a LoLal phenomenon lLs domlnanL Lendencles always make war a remarkable LrlnlLy -
composed of prlmordlal vlolence, haLred, and enmlLy, whlch are Lo be regarded as a bllnd naLural
force, of Lhe play of chance and probablllLy wlLhln whlch Lhe creaLlve splrlL ls free Lo roam, and of
lLs elemenLs of subordlnaLlon, as ln lnsLrumenL of pollcy, whlch makes lL sub[ecL Lo reason alone.
1he flrsL of Lhese Lhree aspecLs malnly concerns Lhe people, Lhe second Lhe commander
and hls army, Lhe Lhlrd Lhe governmenL. 1he passlons LhaL are Lo be klndled ln war musL already
be lnherenL ln Lhe people, Lhe scope whlch Lhe play of courage and LalenL wlll en[oy ln Lhe realm
of probablllLy and chance depends on Lhe parLlcular characLer of Lhe commander and Lhe army,
buL Lhe pollLlcal alms are Lhe buslness of governmenL alone.
1hese Lhree Lendencles are llke Lhree dlfferenL codes of law, deep-rooLed ln Lhelr sub[ecL
and yeL varlable ln Lhelr relaLlonshlp Lo one anoLher. A Lheory LhaL lgnores any one of Lhem or
seeks Lo flx an arblLrary relaLlonshlp beLween Lhem would confllcL wlLh reallLy Lo such an exLenL
LhaL for Lhls reason alone lL would be LoLally useless.
Cur Lask Lherefore ls Lo develop a Lheory LhaL malnLalns a balance beLween Lhese Lhree
Lendencles, llke an ob[ecL suspended beLween Lhree magneLs."
Carl von ClausewlLz, !" $%&, 8ook l, ChapLer 1, p. 89, edlLed and LranslaLed by
Mlchael Poward and eLer areL, rlnceLon: rlnceLon unlverslLy ress, 1976.
14

onstrates that war is not a purely rational, cerebral, and predictable activity such as chess, nor
does it consist of random slashing and killing, but that elements of all three aspects are
present in every war, though in different mixes. Thus, a careful Trinitarian analysis helps a
belligerent to understand what the character of the forthcoming war will be like.
The fact that uncontrollable and unpredictable factors can have a decisive impact on
the course of the war suggests that war is a far from flawless instrument. The war aim, the
reason why we have entered the war, is likely to change in the course of the war as the aim
may become more ambitious when the war is going well for us, or conversely may become
more modest when the war is going badly. Even if we win, we may well be achieving a war
aim that is different from the one that brought us into the war in the first place.
18

Clausewitz also offers sage advice about the conduct of war. Two concepts are of
particular value here: the centre of gravity, and the culminating point. If our war aim
requires us to inflict a decisive defeat on the enemy, we should try to strike with concentrated
force at an enemy centre of gravity (Schwerpunkt) which, in military terms, Clausewitz
describes as the hub of all power and movement.
19

What constitutes a centre of gravity depends on the nature of the enemy. If the enemy
has inexhaustible manpower reserves and resources, then the enemy territory and the
population and resources therein constitute a centre of gravity. If the enemys state is a
heterogeneous entity held together by force, then the enemys capital is a centre of gravity,
because its capture could lead to the disintegration of the whole country. If the enemy is
dependent on the support of another power, then this key ally becomes a centre of gravity. If
the nature of the state is such that the enemy will continue fighting as long as an army

18
19
Ibid., Book VIII, Chapter 4, p. 595.

13

remains in the field, then the enemys field army is the centre of gravity. If we want to strike
at a centre of gravity, we will be forced to defeat the enemys army which is protecting it.
Thus, battle plays a central role in warfare.
Clausewitz also thought about centres of gravity in terms of intangibles: in a coalition, unity
is the centre of gravity; in an insurgency, the charismatic leader and public opinion are
centres of gravity.
The culminating point refers to situations in which a commander has to decide
whether he should shift from the defence to the attack or vice versa. As the attackers army
advances into the depth of enemy territory, it is likely to get weaker in physical and moral
forces as troops become exhausted, the supply lines become overstretched, garrisons have to
be left behind to guard the lines of communication, and combat and disease take their toll.
The attacking army reaches its culminating point when it has become so weak that it can still
hold on to its gains, but can no longer advance with any hope of achieving the campaign
objective. If the commander pushes his army beyond the culminating point, he will not only
fall short of the campaign objective, but also risks that his exhausted troops are struck in their
vulnerable and overextended positions by a powerful strategic counterattack. If a cautious
commander stops the advance too early, however, he may forsake victory. A wise attacker
will therefore stop and consolidate when he is no longer strong enough to achieve the
campaign objective, but still strong enough to hold onto his gains. The fog of war makes it
very difficult precisely to identify the culminating point.
20

The next section will deal with the reception of On War.

20
Ibid., Book VII, Chapter 5, p. 528.

16

Reception and criticism of Clausewitz: Is Clausewitz still relevant?
When Clausewitzs On War was published after his death in 1832, it did not
immediately have a major impact. In fact, it was only after the Prussian victories in the
Austro-Prussian (1866) and Franco-Prussian War (1870-71) that interest in Clausewitz, both
in Germany and outside, began to increase significantly. The British studied Clausewitz
between the end of the Boer War and the Great War (1902-14), the Communists, Lenin and
Mao Tse-Tung in particular, greatly admired his theory, and US military thinkers turned to
Clausewitz for analysing strategy from the 1950s onwards. Since the late 19
th
century, then,
Clausewitz has increasingly established himself as the leading authority on the theory of war
and strategy.
21

His position as the central authority of military thought has never been universally
accepted, though. With the end of the Cold War and the confusing internal conflicts of the
1990s, On War has come under renewed attack.
Single prong of attacks have been directed against Clausewitzs premise that modern
wars are waged by states and between states, rather than by non-state actors. According to
this view, Clausewitzs theory can be discarded, because he describes wars which have
become almost extinct.
22

21
Beatrice Heuser, Reading Clausewitz, London: Pimlico, 2002, pp. 12-23.
22
Mary Kaldor, Elaborating the New Wars Thesis, in Isabelle Duyvesteyn and Jan Angstrom, eds.,
Rethinking the Nature of War, London: Frank Cass, 2005; Martin van Creveld, The Transformation of
War, London: Free Press, 1991.
17

Whilst it is true that internal armed conflicts such as insurgencies, civil war, and
ethnic strife are nowadays more prevalent than conventional wars between states, and whilst
it is also true that Clausewitz primarily writes about states, governments, and conventional
armies though he also mentions insurgency and irregular forces key concepts can still be
applied. Even in a civil war or insurgency, the three aspects of the Trinity are still present:
Whether state, warlord, Communist revolutionary, or international terrorist organization, all
entities are subject to the interplay of the forces of violence, chance, and rational purpose.
23

Instead of government, people, and army, internal wars may substitute in their stead political
leadership, ethnically or tribally defined population base, and irregular forces. In fact, in such
conflicts, it is often the aim of the successful belligerent to acquire the trappings and authority
of a properly constituted and internationally recognised government.
Another prong of attacks has been directed against Clausewitzs premise that war is
the continuation of politics, rather than war being motivated by individual gain or by
irrational urges. According to this view, individuals and collectives do not go to war in
pursuit of rational political objectives, but are driven by religious fanaticism, ethnic hatred,
the dark side of human nature, or the individual combatants desire for loot and gain.
24

Clausewitz does not deny the presence of irrational influences in war. On the
contrary, he explicitly makes them the first element of the Trinity. Yet, every belligerent is
bound to have a leadership which pursues a concrete political aim, be this aim religious or

23
Bart Schuurman, Clausewitz and the New Wars Scholars, Parameters, XL, No. 1, Spring 2010, p.
95.

24
Herfried Muenkler, Die Neuen Kriege, Rowohlt, 2002; also, John Keegan, A History of Warfare,
London: Vintage Books, 1993.

18

secular, materialist or idealist, reasonable or unreasonable in its nature; this makes war an
instrument of politics.
25

Irrespective of the criticism of the Trinity and the instrumental nature of war, On War
is full of enlightening concepts, such as friction, the culminating point, and the centre of
gravity, which, arguably, have lost nothing of their relevance or utility. Beatrice Heuser
concludes: War as an instrument of politics, war as a contest of wills, limited war and
unlimited war, friction, the danger of escalation, all these are Clausewitzian concepts which
today are virtually taken for granted in the military manuals and the key literature of the
worlds leading military powers.
26

Questions to provoke your thinking:
Which of Clausewitzs ideas are most relevant for the platoon/troop or
company/squadron commander on operations?

Why is it justified that the government will often try to influence even seemingly
minor tactical decisions?

Why does a platoon/troop commander need to understand both the political context
and aim of the war?

Which political considerations might induce you, as a subaltern, to forego an
opportunity to inflict heavy losses on enemy forces?

Why is it important for a platoon/troop commander to understand the process of
escalation, as well as the attendant risks and challenges?

Annex: Clausewitz and current British doctrine

25
For a detailed criticism of On War and rebuttals, see Heuser, Reading Clausewitz, pp. 179-194.
26
Beatrice Heuser, Reading Clausewitz, p. 179. See also Annex 3.
19

Clausewitzian concepts are still prominently reflected in British and US military
doctrine publications. For instance, Joint Doctrine Publication (JDP) 0-01.1 defines total
war and escalation in broadly Clausewitzian terms:
total war: General war waged towards unlimited objectives.
27

escalation/de-escalation: A qualitative transformation in the character of a conflict
where the scope and intensity increases or decreases, transcending limits implicitly accepted
by both sides.
28

British Defence Doctrine views military force as an instrument of the state in pursuit
of political objectives:
War is an instrument of policy, normally stimulated by fear, self-interest or ideology,
and is characterised by organised violence, used as a means to assert the will of a state,
individual or group.
29

National strategy directs the coordinated application of the instruments of national
power [] in the pursuit of national policy aspirations.
30

Military power is the ultimate instrument and expression of national power, in
circumstances ranging from deterrence and coercion through to the deliberate application of
force to neutralize a specific threat, including pre-emptive intervention.
31

27
JDP 0-01.1. United Kingdom Glossary of Joint and Multinational Terms and Definitions, 7
th

Edition, p. T-9. General War is defined as: A conflict between major powers in which their large
and vital national interests, perhaps even survival, are at stake. JDP 0-01.1, United Kingdom
Glossary of Joint and Multinational Terms and Definitions, 7
th
Edition, p. G-1.
28
Ibid., p. E-6.
29
JDP 0-01, British Defence Doctrine, 3
rd
Edition, August 2008, p. 2-1, paragraph 201.
30
Ibid., p. 1-3, paragraph 111.
20

However, the military instrument is most effective when employed in conjunction
with the other instruments to achieve national objectives [].
32

British Counterinsurgency doctrine reaffirms the primacy of politics across the
spectrum of operations:
What is important is the principle that in counterinsurgency, political purpose has
primacy. As Clausewitz noted, even in less intense conflicts, the political aim is more
complex and more prominent. This makes counterinsurgency no different from any other
type of military operation because for the UK and its allies, the military operates in support of
legitimate political objectives. This is the case whether the task at hand is general war or
counterinsurgency.
33

ADP Operations quotes Clausewitz on the importance of correctly identifying the
character of the forthcoming war.
34

ADP Operations and the US Field Manual 3-0 confirm Clausewitzs view of the
nature of war, including friction, uncertainty, and fog of war:
a. Friction. Friction is the force that frustrates action, makes the
simple difficult, and the difficult seemingly impossible. Friction may be
mental, perhaps caused by indecision, or physical, for example caused
by the effects of violence. It may be externally imposed, by an

31
Ibid., pp. 1-5, paragraph 122.
32
Ibid., pp. 1-5, paragraph 123.
33
Army Field Manual (AFM) 1/10, Countering Insurgency, January 2010, p. 3.3.
34
Army Doctrine Publication (ADP) Operations, November 2010, pp. 3-6.
21

adversary or the environment, or be self-induced, for example by a poor
plan.
b. Uncertainty and Chaos. No matter how much information there
is in conflict, a fog of war will descend that can lead to uncertainty and
chaos. Chaos amounts to disorder and confusion that is so
unpredictable as to appear random. It is inherent in conflict. Conflict is
a human activity an option of difficulties that is uncertain and
subject to inaccurate or contradictory information. Chaos might be
deliberately exacerbated by adversaries, and presents opportunities for
the bold to seize. It is something to be exploited rather than endured.
35

Chaos, chance, and friction dominate land operations as much today as when Clausewitz
wrote about them after the Napoleonic wars.
36

British Counterinsurgency doctrine, British Defence Doctrine, and Army Doctrine
Publication (ADP) Operations use Clausewitzs concepts of centre of gravity and the
culminating point:
Centre of Gravity. A centre of gravity is the identified aspect of a force, organisation,
group or states capability from which it draws its strength, freedom of action, cohesion or

35
Ibid., p. 3-2.
36
US FM 3-0, Operations, Feb. 2008, Preface.
22

will to fight. Again, this concepts relevance at the tactical level is based on understanding it
rather than using it.
37

Centres of Gravity. The concept of centre of gravity (that from which power or
freedom to act derives) is applicable to counterinsurgency but it is not sufficient to merely
identify friendly and insurgent centres of gravity as a commander might do during combat
operations. A commander will also need to identify the centre of gravity of each of the
elements of society (communities/groups e.g. the insurgents, the host nation government,
allies etc) with whom he is dealing. Selecting the correct centres of gravity is critical to
success and making the wrong choice may skew an operation entirely leading to resources
being wasted or inappropriate action being taken. Similarly, in designing an operation its
impact on multiple centres of gravity should be assessed less success in one direction sets
back others and thus hinders the achievement of a lasting comprehensive solution. Centre
of gravity analysis needs to be regularly examined and changes made
when and where necessary.
38

Culminating Point. A culminating point is reached when the current situation can be
maintained, but not developed to any greater advantage. To attempt to do so, without a pause
or reinforcement, would risk over-extension and the vulnerability this may cause.
39

Culminating Point: An operation reaches its culminating point when the current
operation can just be maintained but not developed to any greater advantage.
40

37
ADP Operations, November 2010, p. 7-7.
38
AFM 1/10, Countering Insurgency, January 2010, p. 7-7.
39
ADP Operations, November 2010, p. 7-7.
40
JDP 0-01.1, p. C-29.

23

Suggested Reading
Clausewitz, Carl von, On War, edited by Michael Howard, Peter
Paret and Beatrice Heuser. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008.
Freedman, Lawrence. War. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994.
Handel, Michael. Masters of War: Classical Strategic Thought. Third revised and
expanded edition. London: Frank Cass, 2001.
Howard, Michael. Clausewitz: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 2002.
Howard, Michael. War and the Liberal Conscience. London: Hurst & Co., 2008.
Howard, Michael. War in European History. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009.
Jomini, Antoine Henri de. The Art of War. London: Greenhill Books, 1992.
Jordan, David, ed. et al. Understanding Modern Warfare. Cambridge: Cambridge
Heuser, Beatrice. Reading Clausewitz. London: Pimlico, 2002.
Paret, Peter, Gordon Craig and Felix Gilbert, eds. Makers of Modern Strategy: From
Machiavelli to the Nuclear Age. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1986.
Strachan, Hew and Andreas Aerberg-Rothe. Clausewitz in the Twenty-First Century.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007.
Smith, Rupert. The Utility of Force: The Art of War in the Modern World. London:
Penguin, 2006.
Sun Tzu, The Art of War. Translated by Samuel B Griffith. Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1963.
Van Creveld, Martin. The Transformation of War: The Most Radical Reinterpretation
of Armed Conflict since Clausewitz. London: The Free Press, 1991.

Total War

24

In contrast to the Clausewitzian natural ideal of absolute war the term total war is
mainly but not exclusively used to describe the character of war in World War I (1914-
18) and World War II (1939-45). Other wars, such as the French Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Wars (1792-1815) or the American Civil War (1861-65), also entailed certain
aspects of totality, but did not reach the same degree as the aforementioned. In the case of the
latter conflict, total war is most directly associated with General William Tecumseh Sherman,
a Union commander who inflicted a deliberate swathe of devastation across the South during
his campaign of 1864.

T
he
term
was
first
used
by
Max
imili
en
Rob
espie
rre
in a
unLll we can repopulaLe Ceorgla, lL ls useless Lo occupy lL, buL Lhe uLLer
desLrucLlon of Lhe roads, houses and people wlll crlpple Lhelr mlllLary resources. l can
make Lhe march, and make Ceorgla howl."
We are noL only flghLlng hosLlle armles, buL a hosLlle people, and musL make
old and young, rlch and poor, feel Lhe hard hand of war. 1he LruLh ls Lhe whole army ls
burnlng wlLh an lnsaLlable deslre Lo wreak vengeance upon SouLh Carollna. l almosL
Lremble for her faLe."
lf Lhe people ralse a howl agalnsL my barbarlLy and cruelLy, l wlll answer LhaL
war ls war. lf Lhey wanL peace, Lhey are Lhelr relaLlves musL sLop Lhe war."
Cen Wllllam 1. Sherman [separaLe occaslons], 1864
lL ls war now LhaL lL may noL be war always. Cod send us peace - buL Lhere ls no
peace excepL ln compleLe submlsslon Lo Lhe CovernmenL, and Lhls seems lmposslble
excepL Lhrough Lhe Lerrors of war. Sherman ls perfecLly rlghL - Lhe only posslble way Lo
end Lhls unhappy and dreadful confllcL ls Lo make lL Lerrlble beyond endurance."
Penry PlLchcock, AuC Lo Sherman
23

speech to the legislative assembly during the French Revolution and was picked up again in
World War I by the right-wing French writer Lon Daudet in his book La Guerre Totale
41
.
However, the term was popularised only in the 1930s with Erich Ludendorffs book Der
Totale Krieg.
42
The former quartermaster of the German Army in World War I attempted to
explain the reasons for the German defeat and elaborated the consequences to draw on for
future wars. For Ludendorff, Germany had lost the war because the government failed to
fully mobilise society towards the war effort. Arguing all future wars would be unlimited,
Ludendorff categorically rejected Clausewitzs notion of restriction in warfare. For him war
was the natural state of mankind and peace only an interval for the preparation for the next
passage of arms. Ludendorffs apocalyptic vision became reality only a few years later in
World War II and was used expressis verbis when the German propaganda minister Joseph
Goebbels declared total war in his famous Sports Palace Speech in February 1943 shortly
after the German defeat at Stalingrad.

T
he
evol
ution
of

41
Daudet, Lon, La Guerre Totale, Paris: Nouvelle Librairie Nationale, 1918.
42
Ludendorff, Erich, Der Totale Krieg, Munich: Ludendorff Verlag, 1935. English
translation: General Ludendorff, The Nation at War, London: Hutchinson,
1936.
1he naLure of war has changed, Lhe characLer of pollLlcs has changed, and now
Lhe relaLlons exlsLlng beLween pollLlcs and Lhe conducL of war musL also change. All Lhe
Lheorles of ClausewlLz should be Lhrown overboard. 8oLh warfare and pollLlcs are meanL
Lo serve Lhe preservaLlon of Lhe people, buL warfare ls Lhe hlghesL expresslon of Lhe
naLlonal 'wlll Lo llve', and pollLlcs musL, Lherefore, be subservlenL Lo Lhe conducL of war."
Ceneral Ludendorff' ()* +%,-." %, $%&' London: PuLchlnson 1936, pp. 23-24.
1he Lngllsh clalm Lhe Cerman people reslsL Lhe measures for LoLal war
lnLroduced by our governmenL. 1he Lngllsh say Lhe Cermans do noL wanL LoLal war, buL
caplLulaLlon. l ask you: uo you wanL LoLal war? lf necessary, do you wanL a war more LoLal
and radlcal Lhan anyLhlng we can even lmaglne Loday?"
1he Cerman MlnlsLer for ropaganda and eople's LnllghLenmenL" !oseph Coebbels ln
hls famous SporLs alace Speech" on 18 lebruary 1943. 1he crowd's unanlmous answer
Lo Lhe quesLlons was yes!" Cver Lhe lecLern a large banner sLaLed: 1oLal War - ShorLesL
26

total wars in the 19
th
century and finally culminating in the first half of the 20
th
century is
closely linked to the Industrial Revolution and the rise of new ideologies, namely
nationalism, liberalism, communism and national-socialism/fascism. Yet, until today
academia has not been able to agree on a common definition for the term total war and has
had to content itself with identifying three key components: far-reaching war aims, radical
warfare methods and the mobilisation of society.
43

War Aims
Starting with the French Revolutionary and Napoleonic Wars (1792-1815) the
belligerents war aims became more ambitious. It was no longer a question of conquering a
piece of land; governments were toppled instead and the map of Europe redrawn under
Napoleon. Yet, in all following wars in Europe the belligerents restrained their war aims
again. This was also largely true in the opening stages of World War I, but changed with the
entry of the USA into the war, as the Allies declared the deposition and the trial of the
German Kaiser as one of their war aims. Political compromise thus became more difficult as
a means of ending wars. This tendency intensified even further with the emergence of new
radical ideologies, namely communism and national-socialism. Cohabitation of these
ideologies did not seem to be possible anymore. The US and the UK demanded
unconditional surrender from Nazi Germany in World War II, and after 1945 German
society had to undergo a comprehensive re-education programme. Though very often

43
Fundamental are five volumes of a series of conferences about the subject of Total War: On the
Road to Total War: The American Civil War and the German Wars of Unification 1861-1871, ed.
Frster Stig and Nagler, Jrg, Cambridge: Cambridge, 1997; Anticipating Total War: The German
and American Experiences, 1871-1914, ed. Boemke, Manfred F., Chickering, Roger and Frster, Stig,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999; Great War, Total War: Combat and Mobilization on
the Western Front, 1914-1918, ed. Chickering, Roger and Frster, Stig, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 2000; The Shadows of Total War: Europe, East Asia, and the United States, 1919-
1939, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003: A World at Total War: Global Conflict and the
Politics of Destruction 1937-1945, ed. Chickering, Roger, Frster, Stig and Greiner, Bernd,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005. Other more dated books include: Wright, Gordon, The
Ordeal of Total War 1939-1945, New York: Harper, 1968; Sallager, Frederick M., The Road to Total
War, New York: Van Nostrand-Reinhold, 1969.
27

acting pragmatically, communist ideology sought nothing less than world revolution and
dominance. National Socialism did not differ in this sense and took it to the extreme with the
conscious extermination of entire races. The Holocaust was thus an unspoken German war
aim in World War II.
Methods of Warfare
The ever more ambitious war aims had a huge impact on the way wars were fought.
In total wars stakes were perceived to be so high that the belligerents often recurred to
methods of warfare normally seen as unacceptable in a cultural and legal sense. Targeting
civilians thus became legitimate, often accompanied by demonising (Filthy Hun) or even
dehumanising (Slav subhuman) the enemy. Consequently, this facilitated ruthless methods
of warfare like naval blockades which led to chronic food shortages, unrestricted submarine
warfare, the bombing of cities, scorched earth policies, or the burning down of entire villages
in anti-partisan operations.

Mobilisation of society
The radicalisation of methods of warfare was closely linked to the idea that the
enemys society was seen as one block. Indeed, modern industrialised wars were no longer an
exclusive business of the army, but the entire nation was affected in one way or another.
Universal conscription was often introduced and the countrys economy geared towards the
requirements of the war. The home front became an integral part of a total war. Due to the
shortage of men in factories during both World Wars, women often had to fill the gaps left
behind and later even benefitted from the war: female suffrage was introduced in the UK in
1918, in Germany in 1919 and in France in 1944. The historian Arthur Marwick has thus
28

argued that total wars are generally a testing field of a society and have a lasting impact on
the nations psyche even long after the war.
44

When talking about total war one must be aware of the different perceptions for each
single belligerent. For example, American society was much less affected in both World
Wars than German or Soviet society in World War II. In the end this can also mean that one
side fights a total war whilst the other one wages a limited war, as many post-1945 examples
show (e.g. the Vietnam War). It must also be emphasised that total wars or elements thereof
are not confined to the period between the French Revolution (1789) and the end of World
War II (1945). For example, the Third Punic War (149BC-146BC) saw the complete
destruction of the Carthaginian Empire including its capital. Similarly, after the Thirty Years
War (1618-48) large parts of Germany were devastated with a loss of two-thirds of the pre-
war population. After 1945, for example, genocide marked the Rwandan Civil War (1990-93)
fought between the rival Hutu and Tutsi ethnicities.
Like absolute war the term total war has to be understood as a heuristic device
45

of a theoretical ideal that can never be reached. Even in the most total wars characterised
by genocidal tendencies, both belligerents still exercise certain restraints, be it for moral,
pragmatic or utilitarian reasons. An example would be the treatment of prisoners of war in the
German-Soviet War (1941-45). Despite a widespread no-quarter policy on both sides, the
vast majority of prisoners were not shot on the spot, but brought into captivity. Due to various
factors the mortality rate was very high in the camps on both sides. Around 50% of the over 5
million Red Army prisoners taken during the war died in German captivity. Yet, the other
half survived because from 1942 onwards they were seen as a useful labour force for the

44
Marwick, Arthur, Total War and Historical Change: Europe 1914-1955, London:
Palgrave, 1988.
45
Chickering, Roger and Frster, Stig, in Chickering and Frster, Shadows, p. 7.
29

German war economy and thus their treatment improved considerably. This ensured the
survival of a far larger percentage than in the first months of the war.
Are total wars a historical phenomenon and have they really ceased to occur around
the globe since 1945?

Does the involvement of civilians in war automatically mean total war?

Are Western armies today fighting against enemies which are prepared to embark on
a total war?

Suggested Reading

Chickering, Roger and Stig Frst, eds. Great War, Total War: Combat and
Mobilization on the Western Front, 1914-1918. Cambridge: Cambridge
Chickering, Roger, Stig Frster, and Bernd Greiner, eds. A World at Total War:
Global Conflict and the Politics of Destruction, 1937-1945. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 2010.
Marwick, Arthur. Total War and Historical Change: Europe, 1914-1955.
Open University Press, 2001.
Marwick, Arthur,ed. Total War and Social Change. London: Palgrave Macmillan,
1988.
Shaw, Martin. War and Genocide: Organized Killing in Modern Society. Polity Press,
2003.

Limited War and Escalation: The Cold War and Beyond
30

In broad historical terms one could argue with considerable authority that the concept
of limited war was certainly nothing new. Clausewitz, for example, wrote that two kinds of
limited war are possible: offensive war with a limited aim and defensive war.
46
Clausewitz
considered the idea of limited war in the context of 18
th
and 19
th
century Europe, but in fact
conflict in Europe enjoyed an extensive period of limitation that ran from the Peace of
Westphalia in 1648 to the commencement of the Revolutionary Wars in 1792.
47
International
conditions peculiar to historical periods contributed to the prevalence of limited war and such
would be the case after 1945.
The dropping of the atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki by the United States
Army Air Force in August 1945 quickly brought about the capitulation of Japan and opened
the nuclear age in warfare. The destructiveness of these weapons represented something of a
climax to the idea of total war but also indicated that the risks to adversaries fighting a total
war were now very much greater. As Bernard Brodie observed, with the advent of nuclear
weapons the entire value of past military experience as a guide to the future was called
basically into question.
48

The impact of nuclear weapons on the future of warfare was profound. Moreover, the
global geopolitical context added a sense of urgency to coming to grips with the impact of
nuclear weapons on warfare. The birth of the nuclear age paralleled the onset of the Cold
War. The global rivalry between the United States and the Soviet Union saw both
superpowers acquire first atomic and then thermonuclear weapons and the means of strategic
delivery to their respective homelands. With each side possessing arsenals of such

46
Carl von Clausewitz, On War, edited and translated by Michael Howard and Peter Paret,
Princeton University Press, 1976, Book VIII, Chapter 5, p. 602,
47
Hew Strachan, European Armies and the Conduct of War, London: Routledge, 1983, p. 3.
48
Brodie, Bernard, Strategy in the Missile Age, Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University
Press, 1959, p. 149.
31

destructiveness grew the conviction that total nuclear war is to be avoided at almost any
cost.
49
The outcome of strategic stalemate was the doctrine of deterrence where each side
maintained nuclear arsenals and delivery systems that deterred either side from initiating a
strategic nuclear exchange. Any gains would be more than offset by the mutually assured
destruction MAD that attended either side starting a nuclear war. The doctrine of deterrence
rested on credible military capability to deliver nuclear weapons and political will to use them
if necessary. Deterrence as a policy evolved over time and in the wake of the Second World
War the nuclear powers were only just beginning a journey of understanding how nuclear
weapons would shape warfare.
50

In the first decade following the Second World War the enthusiasm of the nuclear
powers to explore the possible utility of nuclear weapons moved from the strategic realm to
that of the tactical. The 1953 study of two US Army Colonels, Reinhardt and Kintner, entitled
Atomic Weapons in Land Combat examined the battlefield use of atomic weaponry. The book
advocated such tactical ideas as atomic envelopment entailing manoeuvre through areas
swept by atomic blasts.
51
A more sober study by F. O. Miksche suggested that A-weapons
will atomise tactics to such an extent that the forms of ground combat will take on a
completely guerrilla-like character.
52
Such studies seem somewhat fantastic today given the
lack of illusions over the practical problems of the contemporary use of nuclear weapons but
they reflected the desire to understand the place of these new weapons on the battlefield.
Nevertheless the destructiveness and lingering lethal effects of nuclear weapons could not be
ignored at whatever level of war.

49
Brodie, Strategy, p. 269.
50
The subject of deterrence is comprehensively treated in two books by Lawrence Freedman:
Deterrence, Cambridge: Polity Press, 2004 and The Evolution of Nuclear Strategy 3
rd
Edition,
Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2003.
51
Col. R. C. Reinhardt and Lt. Col. W. R. Kintner, Atomic Weapons in Land Combat,
Harrisburg, PA: The Military Service Publishing Company, 1953, pp. 36-37.
52
Lt. Col. F. O. Miksche, Atomic Weapons and Armies, London: Faber and Faber Ltd., 1955,
p. 218.
32

The Korean War (1950-53) represented something of an early watershed in the
potential risks associated with nuclear weapons and acted as a catalyst to renewed interest in
the concept of limited war. The conflict in Korea began as an attack mounted by North
Korean communist forces crossing the 38
th
Parallel in the peninsula in a bid forcibly to unite
Korea and create a communist state. The North Koreans enjoyed the support of China and the
Soviet Union. The North Korean attack on the south led to the creation of a US-led UN
coalition to defend South Korea from communist aggression. The conflict saw initially North
Korean forces nearly overrun the peninsula and in turn UN forces advance north to reach the
Yalu River boundary with China before the conflict settled into a stalemate roughly at the
point where the conflict began. In the course of the war China intervened, sending the
Peoples Liberation Army (PLA) to the aid of its North Korean ally. Gen Douglas
MacArthur, who led the UN command until his removal in 1951, favoured an aggressive
response to Chinas intervention and advocated widening the conflict into Manchuria and
employing atomic weapons in an attempt to bring the conflict to a favourable end for the UN
coalition. President Harry Truman, however, did not agree and chose not to risk escalation
that could trigger global war.
53
Korea pointed to an emerging pattern of conventional regional
conflicts involving the superpowers either directly or by proxy that were to be a reoccurring
feature of Cold War competition. Nevertheless, limiting such conflicts grew in importance
because of the danger of escalation leading to a nuclear war between the superpowers.
The renewed interest in limited war by the second half of the 1950s had produced
works that would shape thinking on warfare throughout the Cold War. Foremost among the
studies produced in this period was Robert Osgoods book Limited War: The Challenge to
American Strategy. Osgoods study examined the problem of how to limit war in the context
of the Cold War superpower competition and the advent of nuclear weapons. While not the

53
Hastings, Max, The Korean War, London: Pan Books, 1987, p. 226.
33

only figure in the 1950s to consider the issue of limited war, his book stands out for its
historical analysis and for crafting a coherent theory of limited war in the nuclear age.
54
He
developed his ideas of limited war taking into account the experience of the Korean War and
the engagement in the conflict of two nuclear-armed superpowers. The result was a fresh
perspective on limited war where Osgood defined it in the following manner:
A limited war is one in which the belligerents restrict the purposes for which they
fight to concrete, well-defined objectives that do not demand the utmost military
effort of which the belligerents are capable and that can be accommodated in a
negotiated settlement. Generally speaking, a limited war actively involves two (or
very few) major belligerents in the fighting. The battle is confined to a local
geographical area and directed against selected targets primarily those of direct
military importance. It demands of the belligerents only a fractional commitment
of their human and physical resources. It permits their economic, social, and
political patterns of existence to continue without serious disruption.
55

According to Osgood, among these factors listed above there was one more important
than the others. Osgood argued that the decisive limitation upon war is the limitation of the
objectives of war.
56
Also writing in the 1950s, Bernard Brodie believed that limited war
involves an important kind and degree of restraint deliberate restraint.
57
The risks
associated with the use of nuclear weapons provided the driving force behind the need for
deliberate restraint.
Brodies expression of deliberate restraint pointed to another issue related to limited
war the problem of escalation. A recent study on escalation defined it as an increase in the
intensity or scope of conflict that crosses threshold(s) considered significant by one or more

54
Freedman, The Evolution of Nuclear Strategy 3
rd
Edition, pp. 93-96.
55
Osgood, Robert Endicott, Limited War: The Challenge to American Strategy, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1957, pp. 1-2.
56
Osgood, Limited War, p. 4.
57
Brodie, Strategy, p. 309.
34

of the participants.
58
Clausewitz argued in his On War that there is no theoretical limit to the
intensification of violence in war as each belligerent in war seeks to gain advantage. For
those considering the problem of limited war during the Cold War period, understanding how
to control escalation became a major issue. Herman Kahns book On Escalation was among
the best known studies of the problem in the Cold War. It was Kahn who introduced the idea
of the escalation ladder in his attempt to understand the dynamic of escalation. To illustrate
the idea of the escalation ladder, Kahn devised a hypothetical example of one containing
forty-four rungs that started with ostensible crisis to spasm or insensate war.
59
Although
an important piece of work in the literature devoted to escalation, Kahns work today appears
dated and closely associated with Cold War conditions. A more recent study by the American
think tank RAND has moved away from the metaphor of the ladder to that of the climber of a
treacherous ravine face or mountainside.
60
The RAND study argued that escalation cannot
be seen as a linear process but a more fluid one in its consequences hence the rock climber
having to move up, down, sideways or diagonally.
With the advent of nuclear weapons, are all wars in the future likely to be limited?

How might the limited nature of a conflict impose restraints on the actions of a
platoon commander?

If Clausewitz is right that there is no theoretical limit to the intensification of violence
in war, then what steps can be taken to limit escalation or de-escalation in war?

Across the conflict spectrum are the problems of escalation the same for the platoon
commander?

58
Morgan, Forest E., et al., Dangerous Thresholds: Managing Escalation in the 21
st
Century,
Santa Monica, California: RAND Corporation, 2008, p. 8.
59
Kahn, Herman, On Escalation: Metaphors and Scenarios, London: Pall Mall Press, 1965,
37-39.
60
Morgan, Dangerous Thresholds, pp. 17-18.
33

Suggested Reading
Clausewitz, Carl von, On War, edited by Michael Howard, Peter Paret and Beatrice Heuser.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008.
Brodie, Bernard, Strategy in the Missile Age. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University
Press, 1959

Freedman, Lawrence. Deterrence. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2004.

Freedman, Lawrence. The Evolution of Nuclear Strategy. 3
rd
Edition. Basingstoke:
Palgrave, 2003.

Morgan, Forest E., et al. Dangerous Thresholds: Managing Escalation in the 21
st
Century. Santa Monica, California: RAND Corporation, 2008.

Miksche, F. O. Atomic Weapons and Armies. London: Faber and Faber Ltd., 1955.

Osgood, Robert Endicott. Limited War: The Challenge to American Strategy.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1957.
The Problem of Hybridity in War
Clausewitz in his theory of war endeavoured to identify principles that underpinned
armed conflict as a human activity in his period of history. His effort to understand the
features common in war led him to his remarkable trinity, discussed earlier in this chapter.
The Prussian military philosopher, however, also recognised that war is a true chameleon.
61

The metaphor of the chameleon, a creature able to change its colour to blend into its
environment, is an appropriate one for indicating that war is in fact a constantly changing
phenomena. Clausewitz recognised this when he wrote that every age had its own kind of
war, its own limiting conditions, and its own peculiar preconceptions.
62
The challenge for
each generation therefore is to visit anew the complexities of war, seeking to identify that
which is unchanging in the nature of war and to come to grips with the changing character of
war.

61
Carl von Clausewitz, On War, edited and translated by Michael Howard and
Peter Paret, Princeton University Press, 1976, Book I, Chapter 1, p. 89.
62
Ibid., p. 593.
36

In trying to understand the true chameleon, post-Cold War analysis has focussed on
the increasingly complex and multi-faceted character of war where the new and the
unexpected are married to the more conventional means of war fighting. Moreover, this view
maintains that all of the means of war can occur simultaneously and in a battlespace that has
no spatial boundaries. This line of thinking has evolved in recent years into the idea of
hybrid war. In the United States in 2005, two US Marine Corps officers, Lt Gen James N.
Mattis and Lt Col Frank Hoffman produced an influential article in the journal, Proceedings
arguing that the future will be characterised by hybrid war.
63
Hoffman has since written
extensively on the idea of hybrid war, including a paper for the Potomac Institute for Policy
Studies entitled Conflict in the 21
st
Century: The Rise of Hybrid Wars. In this study, Hoffman
defined hybrid war in the following way:
Hybrid wars can be conducted by both states and a variety of non-state actors.
Hybrid wars incorporate a range of different modes of warfare, including
conventional capabilities, irregular tactics and formations, terrorist acts
including indiscriminate violence and coercion, and criminal disorder.
64

Hoffmans definition suggests revolutionary change in the conduct of war. Have
Hoffman and the other exponents of hybrid war identified something new a revolution in
how wars are fought? The term hybrid has been used before to describe the complex and
multi-faceted character of war. Thomas R. Mockaitas in his 1995 book British
Counterinsurgency in the Post Imperial Era described the 1960s confrontation with
Indonesia as a hybrid war, combining low-intensity conventional engagements with

63
Lt Gen James N. Mattis and Lt Col Frank Hoffman, Future Warfare: The Rise of Hybrid
Wars, Proceedings, November 2005, p. 19.
64
Frank G. Hoffman, Conflict in the 21
st
Century: The Rise of Hybrid Wars, Arlington,
Virginia: Potomac Institute for Policy Studies, December 2007, p. 14.
Accessed at web address:
http://www.potomacinstitute.org/images/stories/publications/potomac_hybridwar_0108.pdf.
37

insurgency.
65
What is more, Mockaitas went on to offer the following observation regarding
the problem of hybridity in war:
Hybrid war demonstrates the extreme fluidity of categories such as low,
mid and high intensity when applied to modern war. The conflict
spectrum operates within individual wars as well as separating them from each
other.
66

When tested against the historical pattern of armed conflict, the idea of hybridity is
nothing new either in terms of how wars have been fought or in thinking over the decades on
the character of conflict. On the former point, it is well to remember that in the 1930s Mao
Tse-Tung described his revolutionary war in a way that was recognisably hybrid. The
peoples guerrillas and the main (conventional) forces of the Peoples Liberation Army
were likened to a mans right arm and left arm, the two forms of warfare being
indispensible to the success of the other.
67
During the Second World War, the Allies fought
in a hybrid fashion, arraying conventional forces against the Axis powers while employing
organisations such as the Special Operations Executive (SOE) to organise resistance and to
conduct sabotage and attacks on enemy personnel in occupied Europe.
68

In a similar vein, analysis of the problem of hybridity in war punctuated Cold War
debates on the character of war. In 1958, Raymond Aron described the hybrid nature of war
as polymorphous violence.
69
Andrew Mack coined the phrase asymmetric warfare in the

65
Thomas R. Mockaitas, British Counterinsurgency in the Post-Imperial Era, Manchester:
Manchester University Press, 1995, p. 16.
66
Ibid., p. 38.
67
Quoted from Problems of Strategy in Chinas Revolutionary War, December 1936, in:
Quotations from Chairman Mao Tse-Tung, Peking: 1966, p. 90.

68
M.R.D. Foot, SOE: The Special Operations Executive 1940-46, London: BBC, 1984, and
SOE Syllabus: Lessons in Ungentlemanly Warfare in World War II, Kew, Surrey:
The National Archives, 2001.

69
Raymond Aron, On War: Atomic Weapons and Global Diplomacy, London: Secker and Warburg,
1958, p. 57.
38

1970s and at the end of the 1980s Frank Kitson described hybridity as the ladder of
warfare.
70
Since the end of the Cold War, there have been a string of ideas expressing in
different ways the problem of hybridity in war: compound wars, three block war, beyond
limits warfare, fourth generation warfare war amongst the people.
71
All these post-Cold
War concepts seek, to a greater or lesser degree, to capture the complex and multi-faceted
hybrid character of war. Of all the post-Cold War studies, the monograph entitled
Unrestricted Warfare produced by two colonels of the Chinese Peoples Liberation Army
offered the most thorough and rigorous analysis of the hybrid character of war in the
contemporary setting.
72

This discussion suggests that there is really nothing particularly new about the hybrid
nature of war and, in fact, that the problem of hybridity has long been the subject of study and
analysis. It is therefore better not to think in terms of hybrid war as a new and distinct form
of war, but rather to recognise that all wars are hybrid and that the characteristics of hybridity
change over time. The Development Concepts and Doctrine Centre (DCDC) of the UK
Ministry of Defence (MoD) has highlighted the importance of being alert to the problem of
hybridity in contemporary and future war in its recent study, Future Character of Conflict
(FCOC) that looks ahead to 2029:
Future Conflict will be increasingly hybrid in character. This is not a code for
insurgency or stabilisation, it is about a change in the mindset of our adversaries, who
are aiming to exploit our weaknesses using a wide variety of high-end and low-end

70
Andrew Mack, Why Big Nations Lose Small Wars, World Politics, Vol. 27, No. 2, pp.
175-200; Frank Kitson, Warfare as a Whole, London: Faber and Faber, 1987, p. 2.
71
Thomas Huber, Compound Wars: The Fatal Knot, Fort Leavenworth, 1996; Gen. Charles C. Krulak,
The Strategic Corporal: Leadership in the Three Block War, Marines Magazine, January 1999; Qiao
Liang and Wang Xiangsui, Unrestricted Warfare, Beijing: 1999; William S. Lind, Keith Nightengale,
John Schmitt, and Gary I. Wilson, The Changing Face of War: Into Fourth Generation Warfare,
Marine Corps Gazette, November 2001; and, Rupert Smith, The Utility of Force: The Art of war in
the Modern World, London: Allen Lane, 2005.
72
Liang and Xiangsui, Unrestricted Warfare.
39

asymmetric techniques. These forms of conflict are transcending our conventional
understanding of what equates to irregular and regular activity; the conflict
paradigm has shifted and we must adapt our approaches if we are to succeed.
73

The FCOC went on to emphasize that: 'In future conflict smart adversaries will
present us with hybrid threats (combining conventional, irregular and high-end asymmetric
threats) in the same time and space'.
74
Understanding how war is changing both in the present
and looking ahead into the future has enormous implications for armed forces in terms of
determining doctrine, training and capabilities. Without seeking to understand how war is
changing, how can an army prepare to fight? By the same token, unless past conflicts are
well understood, how can the changing characteristics of war be identified? The study of the
theory of war thus provides a vital intellectual bridge between past, present and future armed
conflict.
Is the hybrid character of war anything new?

If hybrid war is something new, then what has changed in warfare?

How does the hybrid character of war challenge the platoon commander with regard
to doctrine, training and leadership?

In confronting a hybrid adversary intellectual agility is the most important component
of leadership. Do you agree?

Suggested Reading
Kilcullen, David. The Accidental Guerrilla: Fighting Small Wars in the Midst of a Big
One. London: Hurst & Co., 2011.

73
Future Character of Conflict, Strategic Trends Programme, DCDC, 2010, p. 1.
74
Ibid., p. 13.
40

Latawski, Paul, Marching to the Drumbeat of Intellectual Fashion, British Army
Review, Autumn 2011, pp. 7-15.
Murray, Williamson and Peter Mansoor, eds. Hybrid Warfare: Fighting Complex
Opponents from the Ancient World to the Present. Cambridge: Cambridge
Simpson, Emile. War from the Ground Up: Twenty-First Century Combat as Politics.
London: Hurst & Co., 2012.

The Manoeuvrist Approach
The Manoeuvrist Approach is the first precept of the British Armys capstone land
environmental doctrine.
75
The term manoeuvre warfare is generally taken to mean
conducting operations according to the tenets of the Manoeuvrist Approach. The British
Army currently defines the latter as an attitude of mind that encompasses an approach to
operations based upon understanding and manipulating human nature; applying strength
against vulnerabilities and points of influence; and exploiting indirect methods, in order to
affect an adversarys fighting power.
76
This approach involves manoeuvring the mind,
more than it is about physical manoeuvre.
77
Indeed, although fast-paced strategic
penetrations by mechanised forces, backed by air support, became the typical way of waging
Manoeuvre Warfare during the 20
th
century, such physical mobility is not, however, a
prerequisite for an application of the Manoeuvrist Approach. In the 21
st
century, a soldier (or

75
ADP: Operations in the Land Environment, (May 2010), Paragraph 0401.
76
Ibid., Paragraph 0402.
77
Ibid., Paragraph 0402.
41

terrorist) downloading a virus into an opponents IT terminal or holding a Shura to influence
local perceptions would be as much an implementer of the Manoeuvrist Approach as a tank
commander; it is the nature of the enemys vulnerabilities that determines the nature of the
Manoeuverists attack.
Through exploiting the unexpected, the initiative, and a ruthless determination to
succeed, the Manoeuvrist Approach seeks to defeat, disrupt or neutralise the opponent. This
is achieved by employing combinations of power and influence or of violent and non-
violent means to achieve effects which shape the adversaries understanding, undermine
their will, or shatter their cohesion.
78
Activity to influence the perceptions of the enemy, as
well as of other local, regional and international actors, forms a crucial part of the
Manoeuvrists attack on enemy cohesion, will and understanding. The requirement of
understanding the situation forms an essential pre-requisite for the Manoeuvrist Approach.
79

Although Western doctrine first developed these ideas for the conduct of Cold War-era
conventional warfare, many countries military doctrines have subsequently exported these
ideas into what doctrinally used to be termed Operations Other Than War or Other
Operations, which encompasses Countering Insurgency and Stabilisation Operations. With
recent doctrinal perspectives viewing all styles of, or approaches to, war as part of the
complex reality of Hybrid Warfare, the Manoeuvrist Approach now suffuses the full breadth
of contemporary British doctrine for all types of operations in the land environment.
80

The Evolution of Manoeuvre Warfare Theories

78
Ibid., Paragraphs 0403, 0415.
79
Ibid., Paragraph 0207; ADP: Operations (November 2010), Paragraph 0207.
80
Current British doctrine defines hybrid threats as any adversaries that simultaneously and
adaptively employ a fused mix of conventional weapons, irregular tactics, terrorism, and criminal
behaviour in the same battle-space to obtain their political objectives; British Army Field Manual
Part 1 Vol. 10 Countering Insurgency (2010), 1-1.
42

In 1982, the United States Army embraced the worlds first explicitly designated
Manoeuvre Warfare warfighting doctrine, AirLand Battle, a doctrinal shift subsequently
followed by other Western forces. In early 1991, Anglo-American forces conducted the first
major conventional AirLand Battle campaign during their liberation of Iraqi-occupied
Kuwait.
81
These manoeuvre warfare theories had emerged during the 1980s and 1990s in the
context of three processes.
82
First, they developed as a backlash to the perceived ills of the
traditional Western attritional style of warfare, personified by the two World Wars; while
attrition delivered ultimate victory, it did so only after prolonged operations and massive
costs to the victor. Second, Manoeuvrist doctrine emerged in reaction to limited wars such as
Korea and Vietnam, where the U.S. Government only allowed its forces to fight to tie
rather than to win. AirLand Battle doctrine thus sought to restore decisiveness to warfare,
even in limited wars where within overarching political constraints the conduct of
operations would largely be unrestrained. Finally, the doctrine emerged out of NATOs
recognition that attritional operations could not stop the Warsaw Pacts onslaught on Central
Europe; this led to a search for ways of fighting smart that would enable NATO to punch
above its weight.
This last reaction reveals that, at its simplest level, the Manoeuvrist Approach is
merely little more than an admonition to fight smart. In this sense, there is little new about
the doctrine; when the first cave-man tribe ambushed a rival group instead of attacking it
head-on, the era of the Manoeuvrist Approach was born, millennia before the term itself
entered military doctrine. One famous early Manoeuvrist was Hannibal, who in 218 BC took

81
US Army, Field Manual FM100-5 Operations, 1982, 1986, and 1993; John L. Romjue, American
Army Doctrine for the Post Cold-War World, Fort Monroe, Virginia: TRADOC, 1996.
82
Influential early works on Manoeuvrist concepts included: Richard Simpkin, Race to the Swift:
Thoughts on Twenty-First Century Warfare. London: Brasseys, 1985; Richard Hooker, Maneuver
Warfare: An Anthology, Novato., CA: Presidio, 1993; William S. Lind, Maneuver Warfare
Handbook. Novato., CA: Presidio, 1993; Robert Leonhard, The Art of Maneuver: Maneuver Warfare
Theory and AirLand Battle. Novato., CA: Presidio, 1994.
43

his Carthaginian army, including elephant-cavalry, across the seemingly impassable terrain of
the Alps to strike the Roman forces by surprise from the rear. Equally, during 1939-42 the
Germans, in waging their fast-paced strategic armoured operations (subsequently labelled
Blitzkrieg), demonstrated an effective implementation of the Manoeuvrist Approach
decades before the term was coined.
Indeed, in developing these manoeuvre warfare doctrines during the 1970s and 1980s,
American analysts explicitly looked back for inspiration to the earlier doctrinal precedents of
the inter-war years. Between 1918 and 1939 two British officers Major-General J.F.C.
Fuller and Captain B.H. Liddell Hart played an important role in the international debate
over what today would be described as Manoeuvre Warfare, even though Liddell Harts
international impact was more meagre than has traditionally been portrayed. In addition,
towards the end of the First World War, Fuller had developed his Plan 1919, which aimed
at the quick defeat of the German army by deploying echeloned mechanised formations in
order to achieve surprise, shock and even the collapse of the enemy brain, or decision-
making cycle as it is now termed. Even though the plan was not implemented due to the
wars end, it was an important conceptual stepping stone in the development of the
Manoeuvrist Approach. A key practical British stepping stone was the exercises conducted
during 1927-28 by the Experimental Mechanised Force, the worlds first all-arms mechanised
brigade. During the 1930s, however, Britain lost this leading role. Constant under-funding,
the increasing importance of the RAF, and an emphasis on imperial policing rather than on
the seemingly more distant threat of a major European war, all blighted British Manoeuvre
Warfare thinking.
83

83
Brian Bond, The Army Between the two World Wars 1918-1939, in David G. Chandler and Ian
Beckett, eds., The Oxford History of the British Army. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994, pp.
256-271.
44

As a result, Britain lost its edge to other states, in particular Germany. The German
army had always aimed at a quick military victory over its opponents, because Germanys
geo-strategic location in the centre of Europe did not allow for prolonged wars. In contrast to
the Manoeuvrist Approach adopted by the modern British Army of today, and the emphasis
on the defeat of enemy forces, the Germans put more stress on the destruction of the enemy.
84

In World War I, railway systems and the pace of the foot soldier had dictated the speed of
operations. The Germans realised that mechanisation and the build-up of a tank force would
facilitate the application of the Manoeuvrist Approach.
Their version of this approach often incorrectly called Blitzkrieg enabled them
to achieve impressive tactical and operational victories in the first half of the Second World
War. This approach utilised the concentration of mechanised formations at key points to
enact bold high-tempo penetrations, ably supported by Luftwaffe airpower providing Close
Air Support (CAS), Air Interdiction (AI), Air Recce, Airborne Operations (formerly Air
Assault) and Intra-Theatre Air Lift missions. However, a flawed strategy resulted in an over-
stretch of German resources. Heavy defeats on the Eastern Front, in such battles as Moscow
(1941-42), Stalingrad (1942-43) and Kursk (1943) resulted in a heavy death-toll, the loss of
the ability to conduct large-scale mobile operations, and a restriction of initiative and mission
command at higher formation level both vital prerequisites for the successful application of
the Manoeuvrist Approach.
In contrast with the tactical brilliance of the Germans, the Soviet practice of
manoeuvre warfare during the Second World War was built upon sophisticated strategic- and
operational-level doctrine. The key concepts of Soviet manoeuvre warfare the operational
level, operational art, deep battle and deep operations were developed in the period 1905-

84
Matthias Strohn, The German Army and the Defence of the Reich: Military Doctrine and the
Conduct of the Defensive Battle 1918-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010.
43

36. In 1907, Major (later General) Aleksandr Svechin argued that the sheer scale, duration,
numbers and casualties involved in the Russo-Japanese War of 1904-05 meant that massive
military encounters such as Sha-Ho and Mukden were engagements fought at the operational
level, not just as separate tactical battles. The operational level, he argued, occupied an
intermediate position between strategy and tactics, acting as the bridge between the two. In
terms of numbers, depth of front, duration, firepower and casualties the scale of the First
World War confirmed, at least in Soviet eyes, the emergence of the operational level of war.
In the wake of the First World War, the Red Army concluded that modern states
possessed such enormous social, economic and military resources that they could not be
defeated in a single battle, operation or campaign. The Red Army concluded that victory in
war could only be achieved through the cumulative impact of successive operations. This was
a strategic theory but it had significant operational and tactical implications. The Red Army
believed that field armies were dependent upon, and drew their strength from, their
operational rear. It was this system of command, control, communications, reserves, supplies
and infrastructure such as railways, roads and bridges that maintained an army and gave it
direction and flexibility in the conduct of operations. In short, an army relied on its
operational rear to be an effective military force.
Therefore, the key to operational victory lay in the ability to advance through the
enemys operational rear. Soviet thinkers argued that the interaction of tactical losses at the
front combined with deep operational manoeuvre could achieve operational victory. It was
the task of operational commanders to conceive, organise and link tactical battles into an
operational whole; this was operational art. The Red Armys search for the tactical and
operational methods required to achieve success led them to deep battle and deep operations,
respectively.
46

The aim of deep battle was the almost simultaneous neutralization of the defensive
zone in all its depth. Deep battle was a tactical concept designed to achieve a breakthrough
to create the conditions for mobile forces to strike deep into the enemys operational rear.
These deep operations to be conducted by specialist operational manoeuvre forces were
designed to turn tactical success into operational victory. In summary, Soviet manoeuvre
warfare engaged in tactical attrition; that is, deep battle, in order conduct operational
manoeuvre through deep operations.
In addition to these inter-war and Second World War precedents, the developers of
Manoeuvrist thinking also looked explicitly to the examples set by the Arab-Israeli Wars,
particularly the 1967 Six Day War and the 1973 Yom Kippur War. Founded in 1948, Israel
remained geo-strategically vulnerable to the Arab enemies that surrounded it. Israels lack of
territorial depth, its small population (which forced it to adopt a genuine nation-in-arms
mobilisation in times of crisis), and vulnerability to naval blockade led the Israeli Defence
Force (IDF) to adopt a broadly Manoeuvrist approach to war-fighting that aimed to deliver
decisive success quickly. In 1967, fearing that Israel was about to be attacked, the IDF
initiated the Six Day War with a devastatingly-successful pre-emptive air strike against the
Egyptian, Syrian and Jordanian air forces that achieved air supremacy. This subsequently
enabled Israel to employ air power to support the unfolding ground offensive, through Air
Reconnaissance, Close Air Support, Air Interdiction, and Airborne Operations. In the
aftermath of a well-conducted all-arms battle to overwhelm the Egyptian defensive shields in
the Sinai, tank-heavy elite Israeli armoured units, lacking much support from other arms, but
ably supported by air assets, audaciously exploited this success with an advance deep into the
Sinai against weak opposition from a demoralised opponent. This success reinforced the
existing (yet erroneous) Israeli doctrinal belief in the effectiveness of shock delivered by
tank-heavy armoured units, rather than well-balanced all-arms ones.
47

The 1967 Israeli occupation of the Egyptian Sinai, the West Bank of Jordan, and the
Syrian Golan Heights seemed to offer it greater geo-strategic depth, but this victory also
made Israels enemies more determined to win back these lost territories. Continual failure in
the face of Israeli military might, however, led the Arabs to reassess their approach to battle.
Determined to regain the Sinai, the Egyptians conceived a limited war strategy that aimed to
bring the Israelis to the negotiating table. Their plan was to launch a surprise attack across the
Suez Canal under an air umbrella of newly purchased Soviet surface-to-air (SAM) missile
batteries in conjunction with a Syrian assault against the Golan Heights. The initial attack
launched on 6 October 1973, Yom Kippur went like clockwork and successfully established
a bridgehead. As the Egyptians had predicted, during 6-8 October, the Israeli armoured
reserves, despite lacking many supporting elements that were still being mobilised,
repeatedly counter-attacked the Egyptian bridgehead and were bloodily repulsed by dug-in
Egyptian infantry using new Soviet anti-tank missiles, as well as traditional anti-tank guns.
The turning back of the Syrian attack on the Golan Heights, however, forced the
Egyptians to resume their advance, hoping to draw Israeli forces away from the Golan front.
On 14 October, the Egyptian strategic armoured reserves pushed out from under their air
defence umbrella and were decisively beaten by IDF armoured formations that had in the
previous few days relearned an all-arms approache that enabled them to neutralise the
Egyptian anti-tank threat. The subsequent Israeli counter-attack crossed the Suez Canal and
established a bridgehead on the eastern side that encircled the Egyptian Third Army in the
Sinai. The campaign had again demonstrated the key doctrinal lessons learned (but
occasionally forgotten thereafter) back in 1940; namely, that the key ingredients to a
successful Manoeuvrist approach included: the use of a joint air and ground campaign; the
employment of well integrated all-arms armoured formations; the audacious employment of
such armoured spearheads through a de-centralised command style; the seizing and
48

exploitation of fleeting battlefield opportunities; and the generation of momentum to create a
growing crisis with which the enemy could not cope.
Since the development of such Manoeuvrist theories in the 1980s, this body of
thought has incorporated new nuances based upon the experiences of subsequent
Manoeuvrist campaigns. The Coalition campaign to liberate Kuwait in January-February
1991, part of the 1990-91 Gulf War, has exerted the greatest impression on the body of
Manoeuvrist thought. The other major conventional war of the Post- Cold War period, the
US-led invasion of Iraq in 2003, has also allowed Manoeuvrist doctrines to hone their tactics
and techniques as new cutting-edge technologies enter service, thus increasing the range of
capabilities and effects that can be achieved. Finally, the complex US-led counterinsurgency
campaigns in Afghanistan (2001-present) and Iraq (2003-11) have also exerted some impact
on Manoeuvrist theory, leading to a growing discussion on how the Manoeuvrist approach
might be implemented effectively in a partly conventional war setting.
Manoeuvre Warfare Concepts
Having articulated how the body of Manoeuvrist thought emerged in and after 1982,
this chapter will now proceed to articulate the key concepts upon which such ideas are based.
To articulate its current understanding of the Manoeuvrist Approach, contemporary British
doctrine discusses the following eleven key concepts: cohesion; will; understanding;
surprise; shock effect; initiative; tempo; momentum; influence; mission command; and
disruption/pre-emption/dislocation. The ensuing analysis of these British doctrinal concepts
will be placed in a wider Western doctrinal perspective where it is appropriate to do so. The
Manoeuvrist Approach clarified its central concept cohesion by borrowing systems theory
from the sciences. A system comprises many variables that interact to produce the systems
output. Manoeuvre theory saw the enemy as a system, with combat power as its output,
49

whose variables included its fielded forces and the various links (physical and intangible)
that connected these forces together. Cohesion refers to these links ability to facilitate the
interaction between the enemy system variables that is essential for the enemys generation of
combat power. These links include the enemys decision-making capability, its logistical
capabilities, and the flow of will and fighting spirit through the system.
Manoeuvre warfare aims to concentrate strength against these weak enemy links.
By neutralising (rather than destroying) these links through effects-based precision strikes,
the Manoeuvrist can neutralise the opponents cohesion even though most of the latters
fielded forces remain intact. If the Manoeuvrist prevents enemy supplies reaching the front,
paralyses the enemy forces ability to react, and weakens their fighting spirit, then the
Manoeuvrist can render the enemy incapable of offering effective resistance, even when the
latter still possesses most of its personnel and weapon systems. For example, by 28 February
1991, the end of the ground campaign in the First Gulf War, some 75% of the Iraqi fielded
forces remained in the battle-space, but they lacked orders, munitions, and fighting spirit
sufficient effectively to resist Coalition ground operations: in short, their cohesion had been
smashed.
To engage effectively the components of the enemys cohesion, the Manoeuvrist
needs to understand the enemy; this involves understanding the situation, the ground, the
human terrain, and the desired effects/outcomes.
85
To swiftly collapse the enemys cohesion,
the Manoeuvrist strives to seize the initiative, which is why strategic surprise is often a
crucial precursor to a successful Manoeuvrist ground campaign. With the enemy caught
unprepared or unawares, the Manoeuvrist then strives ruthlessly to develop operations with
such tempo and momentum that significant shock is inflicted upon the enemy, who cannot
respond to the opponents actions. If this is achieved the Manoeuvrist is said to have got

85
ADP Operations, Paragraph 0505.
30

within the latters decision-cycle, or OODA-loop (Observe, Orientate, Decide, Act); the
enemy is merely reacting to previous events that have been rendered irrelevant by the
Manoeuvrists subsequent actions. Once within the enemys decision-cycle, the Manoeuvrist
can steadily neutralize enemy will and cohesion. Such an effort is facilitated if the
Manoeuvrist embraces risk and the chaos of war, accepting the lack of situational clarity. A
crucial element of the Manoeuvrists attack on enemy cohesion is activity that influences not
only the adversarys perceptions, but also those of locals and wider public opinion.
To seize and hold the initiative, as well as to generate and maintain high tempo and
momentum during operations, the Manoeuvrist invariably attempts to pre-empt, disrupt or
dislocate enemy reactions. This might be achieved, for example, through air assets carrying
out air interdiction against enemy reserves attempting to move up toward the front line,
although airborne operations might also be used for this task, which may be described as a
depth battle that shapes the unfolding contact battle.
To generate high tempo and momentum during operations, the Manoeuvrist
invariably has to employ some form of Mission Command. This is a command philosophy
of centralised intent and decentralised execution that promotes freedom of action and
initiative. Current British doctrine views Mission Command as the second core precept of
the British Armys approach to operations in the land environment that complements the
Manoeuvrist Approach.
86
Such a devolved command philosophy permits subordinates to
decide how best to achieve their superiors Intent with the resources allocated to them.
Mission Command also facilitates a swift decision-making cycle, which is essential if tempo
and momentum is to be sustained, and also enables fleeting tactical opportunities on which,
perhaps obtained through recce-pull, to be capitalised. Mission Command is based on five

86
ADP: Operations in the Land Environment, (May 2010), Paragraph 0502c.
31

enduring principles: Unity of Effort, Main Effort, Trust and Mutual Understanding,
Freedom of Action, and Timely and Effective Decision-Making.
87

By exploiting their professional skills and advanced technology, manoeuvre warfare
appears to offer modestly-sized Western armed forces a beguiling prospect: the vision of a
quick and decisive victory with modest own-side costs and, through precision neutralization,
with little damage inflicted on the enemy. The success that the 1991 AirLand Battle
campaign achieved in liberating Iraqi-occupied Kuwait subsequently encouraged a confident
America to intervene militarily around the world. U.S. military interventions in Somalia
(1993), Iraq (1996) and Kosovo (1999) produced a profound impact on international security.
The rapid collapses of the Afghan and Iraqi regimes in the face of U.S.-led invasions during
2001 and 2003, respectively, no doubt further reinforced Americas confidence in its
Manoeuvrist doctrine. As subsequent events have showed, however, the achievement of
overwhelming military success no longer necessarily guarantees, as it perhaps once did, the
restoration of regional peace and stability.
The fact that Manoeuvrist warfighting apparently brings decisive success but only
with limited damage inflicted on the defeated side may ensure that the doctrine continues to
exert a profound influence on international security into the foreseeable future. Some of the
future conflicts in which Western forces may become involved will be wars fought for
humanitarian reasons rather than for the direct defence of national territory, harking back to
the 1999 Kosovo Intervention. In such wars, the Manoeuvrist may find that the limited
damage he inflicts could be the crucial determinant of success. In such conflicts, the
Manoeuvrists preservation of favourable domestic/international public opinion may be more
important in achieving success than overcoming enemy resistance; by not being seen to
inflict too much devastation, the Manoeuvrist may sustain international support for a

87
ADP: Operations in the Land Environment, (May 2010), Paragraphs 0438-0456.
32

sufficiently long period to enable him to achieve military victory. As manoeuvre warfare
seemingly makes it easier to win such wars swiftly and cheaply, presumably Western powers
will continue to intervene around the world for humanitarian motives. Whether the probable
decisive Western military victories that arise do or do not restore local stability will go a long
way to determine whether this warfighting approach will exert an overall positive or negative
impact on international security over the foreseeable future.
Suggested Reading
i. Doctrinal literature
ADP: Operations in the Land Environment (May 2010)
ADP: Operations (2010)
ATP 3.2.1 Land Tactics
ATP 3.2.2 C2 of Land Forces
AJP-3.2 Allied Joint Doctrine for Land Operations
AFM Pt.1 Vol.10 Countering Insurgency (2010)

ii. Works on Manoeuvre Warfare and related doctrine

Bellamy, Chris, The Evolution of Land Warfare: Theory and Practice, Routledge, London
and New York, 1990.
Bond, Brian. The Army Between the two World Wars 1918-1939, in David G. Chandler
and Ian Beckett, eds., The Oxford History of the British Army. Oxford: Oxford

Hooker, Richard. Maneuver Warfare: An Anthology. Novato., CA: Presidio Press, 1993.
Leonhard, Robert. The Art of Maneuver: Maneuver Warfare Theory and AirLand
Battle.Novato, CA: Presidio Press, 1994.
Lind, William S. Maneuver Warfare Handbook. Novato., CA: Presidio Press, 1993.
33

Romjue, John L. American Army Doctrine for the Post Cold-War World. Fort Monroe,
Virginia: TRADOC, 1996.
Simpkin, Richard. Race to the Swift: Thoughts on Twenty-First Century Warfare. London:
Brasseys, 1985.
Strohn, Matthias. The German Army and the Defence of the Reich: Military Doctrine and the
Conduct of the Defensive Battle 1918-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
2010.

iii. Campaign-specific texts
Anon. Conduct of the Persian Gulf War: Final Report to Congress. Washington D.C.:US
Government Printing Office, 1992.
Aspin, Les, and William Dickinson. Defense for a New Era: Lessons of the Persian Gulf
War. Washington, Brassey's, 1992.
Bergman, Ahron. Israels Wars, 1947-93. London: Routledge, 2000.

Carver, Michael. The Apostles of Mobility. London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1979.

Cordesman, Anthony. The Iraq War. Westport, CT: Praeger, 2003.

Cornish, Paul, ed. The Conflict in Iraq, 2003. London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2004.

Doughty, Robert A. The Breaking Point: Sedan and the Fall of France, 1940. North Haven:
Archon, 1990.
Dayan, Moshe. Story of My Life. London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1976.

Eshel, David. Chariots of the Desert. London: Brasseys, 1989.

Fontenot, Gregory. On Point: The United States Army in Operation Iraqi Freedom.
Annapolis, MD, 2005.

Freedman, Lawrence, and Efraim Karsh. The Gulf Conflict 1990-91: Diplomacy and War in
the New World Order. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1992.
Frieser, Karl-Heinz. The Blitzkrieg Legend: The 1940 Campaign in the West Annapolis:
Naval Institute Press, 2005.
Gordon, Michael R., and Bernhard E Trainor. The Generals War: The Inside Story of the
Conflict in the Gulf. London: Little, Brown & Co, 1995.
Hallion, Richard P. Storm Over Iraq: Air Power and the Gulf War. Washington D.C.:
Smithsonian Institute Press, 1992.
34

Head, William, and Earl H. Tilford. The Eagle in the Desert: Looking Back at U.S.
Involvement in the Persian Gulf War. Westport, CT.: Praeger, 1996.
Herzog, Chaim. The Arab-Israeli Wars. New York: Vintage House, 1982.

Hiro, Dilip. Desert Shield to Desert Storm: The Second Gulf War. New York, NY:
Routledge, 1994.
Inbar, Efraim. The Gulf War of 1991 Reconsidered (BESA Studies in International Security).
New York, NY: Routledge, 2002.
Keegan, John. The Iraq War. London: Hutchinson, 2004.

Murray, Williamson and Scales, Robert H. The Iraq War. Cambridge, MA: Harvard

Nye, Joseph S. Jr., and Roger K. Smith, eds. After the Storm: Lessons from the Gulf
War. Lanham, MD.: Madison Books, 1992.
OLoughlin, John, Tom Mayer, and Edward S. Greenberg (eds). War and its
Consequences: Lessons of the Persian Gulf War. New York, NY:
HarperCollins, 1994.
Pimlott, John, and Stephen Badsey, eds. The Gulf War Assessed. London: Arms and
Armour, 1992.
Staff of Director of Development and Doctrine, Operations in Iraq: Analysis from a
Land Perspective, 2003.

Van Crevald, Martin. The Sword and the Olive. New York: BBS, 1998.

Annexes
Annex A: The 1940 German Blitzkrieg in the West: The Successful
Application of the Manoeuvrist Approach

Annex B: Soviet Manoeuvre Warfare Concepts, 1942-45

Annex C: The 1990-91 and 2003 Gulf Wars

Annex A
The 1940 German Blitzkrieg in the West: The Successful Application of the
Manoeuvrist Approach
33

Success springs from speed. The important thing is to forget about your right
and left flank and to push quickly into the enemys depth and to take the defenders
again and again by surprise.
88

On 3 September 1939, two days after the German invasion of Poland, France and
Britain declared war on Germany. Despite this act, hardly any fighting occurred on the
western front. Germany was occupied with the campaign in the East, and, after its successful
completion, with the re-grouping of her forces. Both France and Britain were reluctant to
commence offensive actions because of the expectations of high casualties. This period of
comparative quiet, known as the phoney war, gave the Germans time to evaluate the
campaign against Poland and to draw the appropriate lessons from it. It also enabled them to
adapt their plan for an offensive in the West. The initial plan of attack had resembled the so-
called Schlieffen Plan of the First World War; Germany would invade Belgium, thus
bypassing the Maginot Line, the fortifications that stretched along the Franco-German border
from Switzerland to the Ardennes. However, critics of the initial plan, such as General Erich
von Manstein, regarded it as uninspired and unlikely to produce the big victory
89
.
Moreover, when the German plans fell into Allied hands, Mansteins alternative plan was
eventually adopted. This plan shifted the operations main effort from the right (northern)
flank (the Netherlands and Belgium) towards the centre. It was clear that the main German
strike had to fall north of the Maginot Line, because fighting through these fortifications
would result in a loss of surprise, tempo, and momentum, and would also engender high
casualties. Further to the north, the Allies had deployed their main force, so that a German
main effort in the Netherlands and northern Belgium would result in a titanic clash of force-

88
Panzer Group Kleist attack order, Ia/Op Nr. 214/40 (21.3.1940) Bundesarchiv-Militrarchiv, RH 21-
1/19.
89
Mungo Melvin, Manstein. Hitlers Greatest General, London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 2010, p. 137
36

on-force that would probably produce a stalemate like the one experienced in the First World
War. The Germans realised that there was another area that could be used for the main thrust:
the northern end of the Maginot Line where it ended in the Ardennes region, a hilly and
wooden area that was regarded as unsuitable for the deployment of large mechanised
formations. Accordingly, it was defended only lightly by the Allies and it was exactly here,
against the Allied centre, that the Germans decided to strike with their main effort.
The German plan was based on boldness and doing the unexpected. Panzer Group
Kleist, which was to spearhead the offensive in the Ardennes, consisted of over 41,000
vehicles. It was granted only four march routes through the Ardennes; heavy congestion
stretching back as far as the Rhine was the consequence, making the Panzer Group
vulnerable to enemy air attacks. These, however, did not materialise. Further Allied
operational mistakes facilitated the German offensive, in particular the adoption of the so-
called Breda-Dyle Plan: in the case of a German invasion the Allied troops were to advance
into the Netherlands and Belgium, establishing defensive positions in the area of the Dutch
city of Breda and along the river Dyle. For this, the French had to deploy their Seventh Army,
the bulk of their operational reserves, which was then badly needed elsewhere when the
Germans invaded.
On 10 May 1940, the Germans finally attacked. Infantry divisions supported by only a
few tank divisions invaded the Netherlands and Belgium, while in the south the iron fist of
the army advanced through the Ardennes. The most crucial event was the crossing of the
river Meuse by Heinz Guderians XIX Panzer Corps on 13 May, which enabled the Germans
audaciously to drive an armoured wedge into the enemys rear and advance rapidly to the
Channel coast. This, in combination with the realisation of the Breda-Dyle Plan by the Allies,
led to the rapid encirclement of Allied troops in Northern France, Belgium and the
Netherlands. Despite the fact that 300,000 British and French troops were successfully
37

evacuated from the Dunkirk pocket, Case Yellow, the first phase of the invasion, proved an
outstanding operational success. Some 1.7 million Allied soldiers found themselves caught to
the north of the German advance to the Channel coast; of these 1.2 million surrendered or
were taken prisoner.
90
This success enabled the Germans to re-group their forces and to push
deeper into France. The second phase of the operation, called Case Red, lasted until 22 June.
The fortifications of the Maginot Line were attacked from the rear and the Germans pushed
into central France; Paris fell on 14 June and the French government finally surrendered on
the 22nd.
In a campaign that only lasted from 10 May to 22 June 1940, Germany defeated the
numerically stronger Allies in the West. In total, the Germans utilised 135 divisions in the
attack of 10 May (93 of these deployed in the first wave). As pointed out by one historian, the
Wehrmacht resembled a lance whose point consisted of hardened steel; but the wooden shaft
looked all the longer and therefore ever more brittle.
91
In 1940, the German army comprised
157 divisions. Only 10 were tank (panzer) divisions and 6 were motorised infantry divisions;
all the other formations were infantry divisions which marched into France like their fathers
had done in 1914 and their grandfathers in 1870. The German forces were opposed by a total
of 151 Allied divisions, but because the German military had the initiative and established
their main effort, it was possible to convert the Allies absolute superiority into relative
German superiority in the decisive central sector of the front.
92
Here, 45 German divisions
faced just 18 Allied divisions, most of them of a comparatively low quality. The outcome is
even more astonishing when compared to the First World War, which, in the west, lasted for
over four years without strategic German success and resulted in millions of casualties on

90
Karl-Heinz Frieser, The Blitzkrieg Legend: The 1940 Campaign in the West. Annapolis: Naval
Institute Press, 2005, p. 318.
91
Frieser, p. 32.
92
Frieser, p. 90
38

either side. Compared to this, the losses of the 1940 campaign appear light: 49,000 killed in
action and missing on the German side, 120,000 French and 5,000 British KIA and MIA.
93

The reason for the swift success lay in the German conduct of battle. The army
wanted to avoid the tactical slaughter that was typical of the First World War and instead
tried to outmanoeuvre the enemy in an operational manner. However, it would be wrong to
speak of a revolution in military thinking and the sudden emergence of a Blitzkrieg
doctrine. The German army had always aimed at the quick destruction of enemy forces in
battle. It was clear that Germanys geo-political situation would not countenance prolonged
wars against powerful allies which could mobilise their respective empires. Thus, the German
war plan of 1914 aimed at destroying the French army within a matter of weeks. The problem
was that the speed of operations was dictated by railways and, ultimately, by the speed of
soldiers on foot. Both sides operations were restricted by this fact, so that it was difficult to
achieve momentum and surprise on an operational level and to get inside the enemys OODA-
loop. By 1940, the armies were motorised to a higher degree, so that the speed of operations
increased. This gave the Germans the upper hand since the French in particular were trying to
re-fight the more static and prolonged First World War, thus forewent full use of the potential
that motorisation offered to their armies. As a consequence, while the potential absolute
speed of both armies increased, in reality the comparative speed of German operations was
higher than that of the French, making it possible for the Germans to achieve surprise, shock,
and momentum on both the tactical and operational levels. Moreover, the Germans were
superior in the conduct of joint and all-arms battle. Their ground units were well-trained in
all-arms warfare, while their air force provided effective CAS, AI, Air Recce, Airborne
Operations and Intra-Theatre Air Lift. The French marshal, Maxime Weygand, summed up

93
Frieser, p. 318.
39

the different doctrines by observing that, We have gone to war with a 1918 army against a
German Army of 1939. It is sheer madness.
94

Annex B
Soviet Manoeuvre Warfare Concepts, 1942-45

During the inter-war years the Red Armys thinking focused on the operational level
of war, operational art, deep battle and deep operations. By 1943-45 seven key themes
dominated Soviet operations: the broad front; maskirovka; tactical concentration of force;
holding and strike forces; operational simultaneity; and tactical annihilation followed by deep
operational manoeuvre. These principles were incorporated into three forms of operational
art: the frontal blow, operational encirclement and the turning move.
Broad Front. The broad front spread the enemys forces, thus reducing their depth
and density.
95
In conjunction with deception this undermined the enemys ability to discern
the main effort, forcing him to defend his entire frontage. In addition, by reducing the depth
and density of the enemys tactical defences the Red Army increased the chances of a rapid
breakthrough in deep battle.
Maskirovka. This comprised a compound of deception, disinformation, security and
camouflage.
96
It aimed to confuse the enemy by playing to false expectations or misleading
him. It was a mandatory part of the Red Armys commitment to out-think, out-manoeuvre

94
Alistair Horne, To Lose a Battle: France 1940. Boston: Little, Brown, 1969, p. 539.
95
Richard W. Harrison, The Development of Russian-Soviet Operational Art, 1904-37, p. 186;
Raymond L. Garthoff, How Russian Makes War: Soviet Military Doctrine. London: George Allen and
Unwin p. 129. R. Simpkin, Deep Battle: The Brainchild of Marshal Tukhachevskii. London:
Brasseys, p. 34. Norman Stone, The Eastern Front 1914-1917. London: Penguin, 1998, pp. 237-239.
96
Sovetskaya Voyennaya Entsiklopediya (The Soviet Military Encyclopaedia), vol.5., Moscow, 1977,
pp. 175-177 has a detailed definition of the theory and practice of maskirovka.
60

and out-fight the enemy.
97
It was practised at the strategic, operational and tactical level and
was closely connected to the concepts of acquiring the initiative and surprise.
98

Localised Tactical Concentration of Force. The combined purpose of a broad front
and maskirovka was to create disguised concentrations of force to facilitate a rapid
breakthrough.
99
In July 1944, in the Lublin-Brest Operation, Rokossovskys 1
st
Belarussian
Front deployed on a 200 km front, but with 70
th
Army alone covering 120km of this front.
Maskirovka ensured 8
th
Guards Army, the main effort, was secretly deployed on a 9km
breakthrough sector. The 8
th
Guards Armys three rifle corps each deployed on their own
3km sector. These individual corps deployed three divisions, one behind the other. Therefore,
localised concentration in breadth was supported by strength in depth.
100

Holding and Strike Forces. Soviet theory divided formations into holding and strike
forces. A strike force, like 8
th
Guards Army, struck deep while a holding force, such as 70
th

Army, fixed and stretched the enemy.
101
The aim was to make the breadth and depth of attack
compatible.
102
If all Soviet formations had been equal, operational command would simply
have involved launching a huge grinding mass. However, skilful operational commanders
integrated holding and strike forces into an overall plan.

97
David M.Glantz, Soviet Military Deception in the Second World War. London: Frank Cass, 1989,
p.33.
98
Glantz, pp. 22-23.
99
Harrison, p. 63.
100
Glantz, p. 405; B.Petrov, O Sozdanii Udarnoi Gruppirovki Voisk v Lyublinskoi-Breskoi
Nastupatelnoi Operatsii [About the Creation of Shock Groups in the Lublin-Brest Operation],
Voyenno-Istoricheskiy Zhurnal [Military History Journal], no.3, (March 1978), p. 83.
101
Garthoff, p. 134 citing the Red Army Field Regulations of 1936.
102
Colonel V. I. Ulyanov, The Development of the Theory of Deep Offensive Battle in the Prewar
Years, in Orenstein, vol. II, op.cit. p. 292.
61

Operational Simultaneity: Simultaneous General Assault. A Soviet operation was
launched simultaneously in the air, on the ground, in breadth and in depth.
103
A simultaneous
assault disguised the main effort, fixed the enemy and undermined his ability to re-deploy
forces to key sectors. Operational simultaneitys clearest expression was the airborne
descent.
104
Airborne forces were to confuse, disrupt and dislocate the enemy, but theory
proved ruinous in practice. After a disastrous operation over the Dnepr, west of Kiev in
November 1943, the role of airborne forces was executed instead by airpower.
105

Localised Tactical Annihilation. Localised tactical annihilation of the enemy in deep
battle was vital to a Soviet operation. A quick breakthrough created ideal conditions for deep
operations. Failure condemned an operation to grinding attrition or positional stalemate. In
practice some Soviet commanders accepted tactical attrition as an end in itself but this did not
constitute Soviet doctrine, which argued that if a tactical effort does not develop into an
operational achievement it becomes, in essence, pointless.
106

The Nature of Soviet Deep Operations. A Soviet operation consisted of tactical
deep battle and deep operational manoeuvre. The aim of a deep operation was to prevent or
delay the arrival of the enemys operational reserves by defeating these units in detail; to
surround and destroy those units still at the front; and to continue the offensive into the
defenders operational depth.
107
In short, the deep operation sought to turn tactical success
into operational victory. Soviet mobile groups conducted deep operations to:

103
Marshal M. V. Zakhravo, On the Theory of Deep Operations, in Orenstein, vol. II, p. 115 gives the
clearest definition. See also Shimon Naveh, In Pursuit of Military Excellence: The Evolution of
Operational Theory, London: Frank Cass, 1997, pp. 215-16.
104
Garthoff, How Russian Makes War, op.cit., p. 351.
105
See David M. Glantz, History of Soviet Airborne Forces, London: Frank Cass, 1993.
106
G. Isserson, The Evolution of Operational Art, In Harold S. Orenstein, The Evolution of Soviet
Operational Art, vol. 1, op. cit, p.74.
107
N.Varfolomeyev, Operativnoye Iskusstva na Sovremennom Etape [Operational Art at the
Contemporary Stage], Krasnaya Zvezda (Red Star), 3
rd
June 1932, p. 2, cited in Richard Harrsion, The
Russian Way of War: Operational Art, 1904-1940, University Press of Kansas, 2001, p.195.
62

Pre-empt enemy defences
Disrupt and defeat enemy reserves
Secure bridgeheads and river crossings
Seize key ground and systemic points
Threaten enemy withdrawal routes and approach routes
Exercise psychological leverage upon the enemy
By-pass enemy strong points and forces
Inflict continuing losses on the enemy
108

Frontal Blow. A frontal blow aimed to penetrate the enemys tactical defences and
launch a deep operation designed to splinter the enemy into isolated tactical pieces before
shattering his physical and psychological cohesion.
109
On 17

January 1945, Marshal
Rokossovsky unleashed 5
th
Guards Tank Army into East Prussia. It crashed into the German
operational rear, reached the Baltic coast and cut off German troops in East Prussia. This
deep strike achieved the strategic division of East Prussia from Germany and shattered the
operational cohesion of German forces in western and eastern Prussia. Simultaneously, deep
operations by individual Soviet armoured corps fragmented German tactical forces. In short,
in strategic, operational and tactical terms the East Prussian operation of January 1945
constituted a classic frontal blow operation.
110

108
P. A. Kurochkin, Operations of Tank Armies in Operational Depth, in Selected Readings from
Military Thought, 1963-1973, Washington D.C., 1982, p. 65.
109
A. M. Volpe, Frontalnyi Udar [Frontal Blow], in A. B. Kadishev, Voprosy Strategii I
Operativnogo Iskusstva [Questions of Strategy and Operational Art], pp. 362-373; S. Naveh, In
Pursuit of Operational Military Excellence, op. cit. pp. 213-215, discusses different forms of the
frontal blow.
110
Tsentralyni Arkhiv Ministerstva Oborny [Central Archive of the Ministry of Defence], f. 46. op.
2430. d.1369. Boyevoye Doneseniye Shtaba 2-go Belorusskogo Fronta O Razvitti Nastupatelniya I
Vykhode Podvizhnykh Chasey Fronta K Yuzhnomu Poberezhyu Danzigskoy Bukhty v Rayone
Severnee Elbinga [Battle Report of the Staff of 2
nd
Belorussian Front About the Development of the
63

Operational Encirclement and Annihilation. Other Red Army commanders such as
Zhukov, however, emphasised massive operational encirclements.
111
Physical annihilation
was the key, so if the enemy lacked depth, deep operations were shallow. If the enemy
possessed greater depth, operational manoeuvre was deeper. Therefore, in this area of
operational art deep operations were a means to an end. The dominant theme was operational
annihilation, not depth. It is ironic that Zhukov, the epitome of a Soviet commander,
possessed an operational style that was Germanic.
112

The Turning Move (obkhod) targeted the psychological will to fight through a deep
strike into the enemy operational rear. It was designed to threaten key ground as well as the
potential destruction of the enemy. By threatening catastrophic annihilation Soviet
commanders sought to manoeuvre the enemy out of a position. However, the Red Army
understood that the psychological threat of the obkhod required the raw, physical fighting
power necessary to make the threat of annihilation a credible one. Therefore, the
psychological concept of the obkhod relied heavily on physical fighting power. After
Stalingrad, German soldiers were susceptible to fears of disaster and none could be under any
illusions about the ruthless determination of the Red Army.
113

Soviet operational art, deep battle and deep operations were distinctly Russian
concepts that anticipated similar western ideas by half a century. The Red Army may not

Offensive and Movement of Front Mobile Formations to the Southern Coast of the Bay of Danzig in
the Area North of Elbing], 26
th
January 1945.
111
In the period August 1939-March 1945, Zhukov was involved in the planning or execution of at
least nine major operational scale encirclement and annihilation operations in contrast to his fellow
commander, Marshal Rokossovskiy whose preferred operational method was the deep operational
strike. See, Stephen Walsh, Leadership and Command on the Eastern Front (1941-1945): The
Military Style of Marshal Konstantin Rokossovskiy, Ph.D Thesis, Cranfield University, 2009, pp. 344-
347.
112
Walsh, op.cit., p.347.
113
See Chris Bellamy, Heirs of Genghis Khan: The Influence of the Tartar-Mongols on the Imperial
Russian and Soviet Armies, The Journal of the Royal United Services Institute, CXXVIII, No.1,
March 1983, pp. 54-55; C. Bellamy, The Evolution of Land Warfare: Theory and Practice, London
and New York: Routledge, 1990, p.34; R. Simpkin, Deep Battle London: Brasseys, 1997, p. 33.
64

have matched the tactical prowess of the Germans, but at the operational and strategic level in
the period November 1942-May 1945 it frequently out-thought and out-manoeuvred the
Wehrmacht. It might be argued that with the possible exception of the Normandy landings,
this was not an achievement matched by the western allies.
Annex C
Modern Manoeuvrist Wars: The 1990-91 and 2003 Gulf Wars
On 2 August 1990, Iraqi forces occupied the oil-rich neighbouring state of Kuwait. In
response, the United Nations authorised the defensive deployment to the region of a 500,000-
strong U.S.-led multinational coalition, and subsequently the use of military force to reverse
Iraqs aggression, giving the Iraqis until 15 January 1991 to withdraw. On 16 January, with
no withdrawal apparent, the Coalition initiated the First Gulf War. The campaign allowed
U.S. forces to test their new AirLand Battle Manoeuvre Warfare doctrine, which used
advanced technology to fight a decisive Joint-service campaign in pursuit of limited political
aims. The Coalition air war lasted 43 days, but only involved simultaneous ground operations
during its last 100 hours. Combining attritional strikes against Iraqs ground forces with
strategic efforts, spearheaded by revolutionary Stealth aircraft to smash Iraqs C
3
I
capabilities, the air campaign was stunningly successful. Saddam responded by firing Scud
missiles against Israel, unsuccessfully aiming to bring it into the war and thus collapsing the
Coalitions cohesion. With the achievement of not just Air Superiority but Air Supremacy,
Coalition airpower effectively supported the ensuing ground war through Air
Reconnaissance, Close Air Support, Air Interdiction, and Airborne Operations.
On 24 February, the Coalition ground war against Iraqs ground forces, 250,000-
strong, commenced. Some 24 infantry divisions manned the Iraqi defences along Kuwaits
coast and the Iraqi-Saudi/Kuwaiti-Saudi borders. Behind them Saddam deployed as mobile
63

reserves eight army and seven Republican Guard divisions, the latter forming his regimes
politico-military backbone. Saddam hoped that the Coalition would operate solely on
Kuwaiti, not Iraqi, territory, and thus pose little threat to his regime his overriding concern.
Iraqi strategy aimed to force a compromise on the Coalition by inflicting heavy casualties, or
at least be expelled from Kuwait in what Saddam could spin as admirable Arab resistance
to Western neo-imperialism. This strategy failed due to the Coalitions professional skills and
cutting-edge technology, as well as the Iraqi forces inherent weaknesses. Saddam never
placed the need for military victory above his staying in power; with the exception of the
Guard, he restricted his conscript forces competence to prevent them posing an internal
threat. Moreover, Iraqs centralised command ethos ensured its commanders obeyed
Saddams orders. Coalition air strikes smashed Iraqi C
3
I

capabilities and with commanders
unable to act on their own initiative, Iraqi ground units reacted very sluggishly to the high-
tempo Coalition operations, which got inside the enemys decision-making cycle. Air attacks
further degraded the Iraqis already fragile morale, which led to thousands of soldiers eagerly
surrendering.
The Coalition ground campaign plan comprised two key elements. In the east,
Coalition forces would assault north toward Kuwait City to fix Iraqi forces, thus facilitating
the main effort across remote desert terrain out to the west. Here, U.S. armour would advance
200 miles north-east in a left hook to smash the Guard and seal off Kuwait to the south; the
Coalition would thus achieve decisive success within a limited geographical area. The ground
war developed broadly as planned. During 24-27 February, as the eastern attack unfolded,
further west U.S. mobile forces charged north-east. Operating over flat desert terrain, these
forces not only generated tempo and momentum, but inflicted shock upon the enemy,
allowing them to overrun numerous Iraqi positions. During these battles Iraqi fire failed to
destroy a single American tank, testifying to the Coalitions technological superiority. By 27
66

February only a sliver of north-eastern Kuwait remained to be liberated, and so at 0800 hours
on the 28
th
the Coalition accepted an Iraqi-proposed ceasefire.
The Coalition had achieved a stunning military victory in pursuit of limited political
aims, liberating Kuwait at a cost of 996 combat casualties against 65,000 enemy casualties
inflicted, thus validating AirLand Battle doctrine. This victory, however, was more
ambiguous than it seemed. Despite overwhelming tactical success, the Coalition did not fully
achieve its secondary aims of destroying Saddams WMD and his Guard, which meant that
he could continue to destabilise regional security. One reason for this wider failure was the
impact of media coverage. During 27 February the Western publics attitude to the war
swiftly changed after viewing scenes of the apparent mass-slaughter of Iraqis along the Basra
road; this change shocked the American government into prematurely ending the war. This
failure to limit Saddams de-stabilising regional influence led to confrontations that
culminated in the 2003 U.S.-led invasion of Iraq.
The U.S. forces that undertook Operation Iraqi Freedom (2003) were considerably
smaller than those that had been so successful in Operation Desert Storm: the post-Cold War
draw down had seen to that. Doctrine had changed, too, to reflect a new world order. Many in
the U.S. military advocated a heavy, cautious invasion in keeping with the Powell Doctrine of
Overwhelming Force; however, the Secretary of Defense, Donald Rumsfeld was adamant
that the force would be considerably smaller light, lean and mean, as he put it.
114
Indeed,
the Coalition would deploy less than half the troops and one-third of the tanks used in 1991.
Unable to deploy from Turkey in the North, the main U.S. assault came from the
south via Kuwait in the shape of 3
rd
Mechanized Infantry Division and 1
st
Marine

114
Department of Defense daily brief, 20 March 2003, cited by Philip Wilkinson and Tim Garden,
Military Concepts and Planning in Paul Cornish, ed., The Conflict in Iraq, 2003, London: Palgrave
Macmillan, 2004, p. 111.
67

Expeditionary Force (1
st
MEF), supported by the 101
st
and 82
nd
Airborne Divisions. Heading
straight for Baghdad, reckoned to be the Iraqi centre of gravity avoiding both significant
Iraqi forces and major conurbations the 3
rd
Division advanced along a western axis roughly
following the Euphrates River, while 1
st
MEF thrust north up the eastern route along the
course of the Tigris. Unlike 1991 there was no long preliminary air bombardment. Twelve
years of UN-imposed sanctions and intermittent air strikes meant that the Iraqi air defences
were already degraded. Thus, the opening air effort of 20-21 March concentrated on
supporting the ground invasion; it was only on the following night that the full weight of
Coalition air power was concentrated on Baghdad as part of the so-called shock and awe
campaign, which failed both to bring down the regime or instigate the immediate collapse of
the army. Indeed, the main contribution of the highly integrated air campaign was the
immediate establishment of air supremacy and the support it provided for ground
operations.
115

The ground campaign was remarkably successful. Iraqi forces failed to mount much
coordinated resistance, and an attempt to counter-attack on 26-27 March during a sandstorm
was devastated by Coalition air power. The twin-pronged advance on the capital made
excellent progress and the deployment of 173
rd
Airborne Brigade to the north in conjunction
with special forces and Kurdish guerrillas fixed the Iraqi forces north of Baghdad in place
and took pressure off the advance in the south. U.S. forces defeated the Republican Guard
divisions defending the capital without any difficulty and then 3
rd
Infantry Division began a
series of armoured reconnaissance by force probes or Thunder Runs into the city. This
was followed by a major drive into the centre of the city that took advantage of the collapsing
defence and by 9 April the city had fallen. Fighting elsewhere continued sporadically until
about 14 April.

115
Williamson Murray and Robert H. Scales, The Iraq War, Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press, 2003, pp. 110-1.
68

The broadly conventional phase of the 2003 invasion was a remarkable example of
manoeuvre warfare. Although Iraqi performance was singularly unimpressive, the U.S. drive
for Baghdad, correctly seen as the regimes centre of gravity, demonstrated flexibility,
maintenance of momentum and application of shock action that by any measure shattered
the enemys cohesion and will to fight.
The British contribution to the invasion of 2003, Operation Telic, was similar in scale
and complexion to that of Operation Granby in 1991: roughly 20,000 troops of 1
st
Armoured
Division. This time, however, it was a considerably higher proportion of the Coalition ground
effort, comprising about one third of the land power committed.
116
First Armoured Division,
consisting of 7
th
Armoured, 3

Commando and 16

Air Assault Brigades had the tasks of
securing the Ramaila oil fields, seizing the vital port of Umm Qasr and besieging and then
capturing Basra, Iraqs second city.
On 20 March 2003, supported by naval gunfire, land based artillery and U.S.
airpower, Royal Marines and U.S. and British special forces seized the oil facilities on the Al-
Faw peninsula, taking the Iraqi defenders by surprise. U.S. Marines captured the port at Umm
Qasr before handing it over to 3 Commando who then went on to clear the city. The troops of
16 Air Assault, meanwhile, and 7
th
Armoured Division pushed north onto the outskirts of
Basra. The Iraqi defence was predicated on drawing the British into an urban battlefield. The
1
st
Armoured Division commander, Major-General Robin Brims was unwilling to comply
and a state of siege developed over the subsequent two weeks. The British pushed special
forces and sniper teams into the city, launched raids against Baath Party targets and directed
air strikes against Iraqi command and control centres. An Iraqi attempt to launch an armoured
break-out was decisively defeated by Challenger tanks of the Scots Dragoon Guards.

116
Murray and Scales, p. 132.
69

On 6 April the British mounted a three-pronged drive into the city centre. The
intention had been to pull back at night, but Brims judged that the situation had reached its
tipping point and the Baath Party was on the point of collapse.
117
Thus, the British battle
groups pushed on and the final Iraqi stand took place in the Manawi Albashi district which
had to be cleared with, in the words of a British officer, good old-fashioned bayonet and rifle
work.
118
Basra had been captured at minimal cost in both British and civilian lives. While
certainly not a classic mobile battle, the British had used Manoeuvrist principles in refusing
to play to Iraqi strengths and fight as their opponents had hoped. The British had targeted the
Iraqi centre of gravity the Baath Party command and control structure and achieved
tactical and moral dominance. They had accurately judged the point of Iraqi collapse and thus
maintained the momentum of their final assault, bringing about the end of Baathist control in
Basra. While militarily overrunning the entire country had proven relatively straightforward,
winning the peace proved more problematic. We now know that Saddam had recognised that
he could not prevent a U.S.-led invasion overrunning the country, so instead prepared to
wage a subsequent well-orchestrated insurgency. In so doing, Saddam focussed less on
resisting the American military conquest of Iraq and more on ensuring that this U.S. victory
did not lead to peace on the latters terms. In that sense Saddam could be aptly described as
using his strength to engage Coalition weakness; one is thus left wondering whether Saddam
was in fact the most Manoeuvrist actor during the war in Iraqi during 2003-04.

Glossary of Manoeuvre Warfare terms

Airborne
Operations
(formerly,
Deliver land forces directly onto the
objective in order to seize ground or
installations that are vital to the opponent.
Allied Joint publication
[AJP]-3.2 Allied Joint
Doctrine for Land

117
Wilkinson and Garden, p. 129.
118
Murray and Scales, p. 152.
70

Air Assault) This may be achieved by airdrop or air-
landing delivery.
Operations, Paragraph
0414.SH
Air
Interdiction
(AI)
Air operations conducted to divert,
disrupt, delay, degrade or destroy an
enemys military potential before it can be
brought to bear effectively and at such
distance that detailed integration of each
air mission with the fire and manoeuvre of
friendly forces is not required.
Doctrine for Land
0412a.SH
AirLand
Battle
The US land and air forces Manoeuvrist
Joint Doctrine introduced in the 1982
version of FM-100-5 (Operations).
John L. Romjue,
American Army Doctrine
for the Post Cold-War
World, Fort Monroe,
Virginia: TRADOC,
1996, page 16-17.SH
Air
Superiority
That degree of dominance in the air battle
of one force over another which permits
the conduct of operations by the former
and its related land, sea and air forces at a
given time and place without prohibitive
interference by the opposing force.
JDP-0.01.1 United
Kingdom Glossary of
Joint and Multinational
Terms and Definitions.
SH
Air
Supremacy
That degree of air superiority wherein the
opposing air force is incapable of
effective interference.
JDP-0 01.1 United
Kingdom Glossary of
SH
Close Air
Support
(CAS)
Action by fixed and rotary wing aircraft
against hostile targets, which requires
detailed integration of each air mission
with the fire and movement of friendly
forces for fratricide avoidance and
targeting guidance.
Doctrine for Land
0412b. SH
Cohesion The action or fact of forming a united
whole. It is central to the effectiveness of
teams of all sizes . [and] has three
related aspects: moral, conceptual, and
physical.
ADP: Operations in the
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0408. SH
Combat The total means of destructive and/or
disruptive force which a military
JDP-0.01.1 United
Kingdom Glossary of
71

Power unit/formation can apply against an
opponent at a given time.
SH
C3I Command, Control, Communications and
Intelligence
Common Usage
Decision-
cycle
See OODA Loop n/a
Defeat To diminish the effectiveness of the
enemy, to the extent that he is either
unable to participate in combat or at least
cannot fulfil his intention.
JOTAC Aide-Memoire,
Page 46. SH
Destroy To kill or so damage an enemy force that
it is rendered useless.
JOTAC Aide-Memoire,
Page 44. SH
Disrupt [To] Break apart the enemy formation and
its tempo; to rupture the integrity of the
enemys capability.
JOTAC Aide-Memoire,
Page 44. SH
Effects The consequences of activities. They are
changes or consequences as a result of
actions, circumstances, or other causes.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0427. SH
Fix To deny the enemy his goals, to distract
him and thus deprive him of his freedom
of action to gain ones own forces
freedom of action.
JOTAC Aide-Memoire,
Page 44. SH
Hybrid
Threats
Any adversaries that simultaneously and
adaptively employ a fused mix of
conventional weapons, irregular tactics,
terrorism, and criminal behaviour in the
same battle-space to obtain their political
objectives.
Army Field Manual Part
10 Countering
Insurgency (2010), Page
1-1. SH
Initiative The ability to dictate the course of tactical
events.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0427. SH
Intra-theatre
airlift
Provides air movement within the J[oint]
O[perating] A[rea] and is normally
fulfilled by tactical air transport/support
helicopters capable of operation under a
wide range of tactical conditions,
Doctrine for Land
72

including small, austere, unimproved field
operations.
0413b. SH
Intent Is defined as Purpose. It represents what
the commander has determined to achieve
and binds the force together; it is the
principal result of decision-making. It is
normally expressed using effects and
objectives.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0446. SH
Manoeuvrist
Approach
An attitude of mind. It is an approach to
operations based on understanding and
manipulating human nature; applying
strength against vulnerabilities and points
of influence; and exploiting indirect
methods, in order to affect an adversarys
fighting power. The essence of the
approach is that the effect achieved is
more important than how it is done. .
The Manoeuvrist Approach is about
manoeuvring the mind, more than it is
about physical manoeuvre.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0402. SH
Manoeuvrist
Approach
(1996
definition)
An approach to operations in which the
shattering of the enemys overall cohesion
and will to fight is paramount. It calls for
an attitude of mind in which doing the
unexpected, using initiative and seeking
originality is combined with a ruthless
determination to succeed.
Design for Military
Operations: The British
Military Doctrine
(1996), Page 4-21. SH
Manoeuvre
Warfare
A war-fighting philosophy that seeks to
defeat the enemy by shattering his moral
and physical cohesion his ability to fight
as an effective, co-ordinated whole
rather than by destroying him physically
through incremental attrition.
JDP-0.01.1 United
Kingdom Glossary of
SH
Manoeuvre
Warfare
(1996
definition)
[Operations] that seek to inflict losses
indirectly by envelopment, encirclement
and disruption. [These aim at] the
destruction of the enemys will and
cohesion by inflicting on him a series
of rapid, violent and unexpected actions
which create a turbulent and deteriorating
situation with which he cannot cope.
Design for Military
Military Doctrine (1996)
Page 4-22. SH
73

Main Effort A concentration of forces or means, in a
particular area, where a commander seeks
to bring about a decision.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0452. SH
Mission
Command
A command philosophy of centralised
intent and decentralised execution, that
promotes freedom of action and initiative.
Land Environment,
Paragraphs 0404, 0445.
SH
Momentum The effect that a formation or unit that is
moving can have. It is the product of that
forces size and speed (mass multiplied by
velocity).
Design for Military
Military Doctrine (1996)
Pages 4-23 4-24. SH
Neutralise To render the enemy temporarily
ineffective.
JDP-0.01.1 United
Kingdom Glossary of
SH
OODA-loop The phases of the decision-making
process or Observe, Orient[ate], Decide,
and Act as conceived by USAF Colonel
John Boyd in the 1970s.
Common Usage
Other
Operations
Other Operations are those that are
conducted in situations other than war; it
replaces Operations Other Than War to
reflect the need for similar combat
capabilities in situations short of
warfighting.
JDP-0.01.1 United
Kingdom Glossary of
SH
Operations
Other Than
War
Operations in which key factors other than
war would be the key elements in
achieving mission success; [they] involve
often complex and sensitive political
situations when victory comes more
subtly than in war.
John L. Romjue,
American Army Doctrine
for the Post Cold-War
World, Fort Monroe,
Virginia: TRADOC,
1996, page 126. SH
Operational
Art
Operational Art is the orchestration of a
campaign, in concert with other agencies,
to convert strategic objectives into tactical
activity and employment of forces in
order to achieve a desired outcome. The
key aspects of this art need to be
recognised and understood by those
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0601. SH
74

operating at the tactical level, not least
because it is the source from which they
derive intent.
Operational
Level
The operational level of warfare provides
the bridge between the strategic and
tactical levels. It is the level at which a
J[oint] F[orce] C[ommander] or theatre
commander plans, conducts and sustains
military operations as part of an overall
inter-agency approach.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0119. SH
Pre-emption. To seize an opportunity, which may be
fleeting, in order to deny him [the enemy]
an advantage before he acts. It wrests the
initiative from the adversary and frustrates
his plan.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0429. SH
Shape
(Shaping)
Shaping tasks create or preserve the
conditions for the success of the decisive
act. Those conditions relate to the enemy,
the environment, and a force itself.
Influence is a key outcome of shaping
tasks. Achieving economy of effort is an
important aspect of shaping tasks, as it
supports the concentration of force, in
time and space, required for the decisive
act. Shaping may occur before, during or
after the decisive act. Shaping will often
be aimed at the perceptions of the parties
involved and the population.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0613. SH
Shock Action The sudden, concentrated application of
violence.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0424. SH
Tempo The rate of activity [it] is a measure of
the extent to which the potential speed of
a formation or unit is exploited relative to
the enemy.
Design for Military
Military Doctrine
(1996), Page 4-24. SH
Unity of
Effort
Stems from a number of inter-related
means. These include: the commanders
ability to formulate a clear intent and
mission statements; the use of common
doctrine, tactics, techniques and
procedures; a common language of
Doctrine for Land
0614. SH
73

command; a high standard of collective
training and teamwork; and the
designation of a main effort. Taken
together, these generate common
understanding throughout a force.
Will Will is the determination to persist in the
face of adversity. It has two aspects: intent
and resolve.
Land Environment,
Paragraph 0417. SH

Coalition and Expeditionary Operations

The contraction of British global power and the disappearance of the British Empire
have decisively shaped how the United Kingdom conducts its British military operations in
the aftermath of the Second World War. Moreover, the pace of change has only accelerated
since the Cold War has come to an end. The application of British military force is now most
likely to take place in the context of a coalition and to involve an expeditionary dimension.
As General Sir Jack Deverell has commented there are two distinct military phenomena that
are almost always intrinsically linked: expedition and coalition.
119
For reasons of evolving
foreign policy priorities, changed strategic circumstances and diminished economic
resources, British military power is most likely to be deployed alongside others and at a
distance from the United Kingdom. It has been only rarely used in a unilateral fashion - - the
Falklands conflict in 1982 being one of the few notable cases. With a greatly diminished
capacity for the unilateral military action, the British armed forces have engaged with allies
and partners in coalition operations. Although in a few instances, the coalition military action
has been undertaken as an equal partner (Suez 1956), more often than not and particularly
since the end of the Cold War, collaborative military endeavours have been as a junior

119
General Sir Jack Deverell, Coalition Warfare and Expeditionary Operations, RUSI Journal,
(February 2002), p. 18.
76

partner to the United States (Gulf Wars and Afghanistan). With a greatly reduced global
network of bases, operations in the wake of the Cold War have become expeditionary in
character. Post-Cold War political developments saw British defence policy shift from a
NATO European-centric military posture to one focused increasingly upon expeditionary
operations outside the UK-NATO area. This renewed emphasis on expeditionary operations
has provided an important reminder of the doctrinal and capability challenges in mounting
and sustaining operations at a distance from the UK home base. This chapter will examine in
turn the nature of coalition and expeditionary operations by defining key concepts,
highlighting the relevant elements of doctrine, and considering the challenges associated with
these types of operations. The case studies to the chapter will provide supplementary material
concerning Iwo Jima 1945, Suez 1956, Falklands 1982, Sierra Leone 2000 and the invasion
of Iraq 2003 from the perspective of coalition and expeditionary operations.

Why embark on a coalition operation?

The answer to this question is to aggregate the military power of individual states into
a stronger whole so that the sum of each individual part is greater than any single
contribution. Harnessing the aggregated military strength on a coalition operation, however,
has always been more challenging than arriving at a simple sum of all of its participants
contributions. Indeed, critics of coalitions argue that the very opposite can be true: coalitions
mean friction, inefficiency, and the whole amounting to less than the sum of the parts.
120

Because of the challenges inherent in a military coalition, the fulcrum of opinion is distinctly
tilted in the direction of the detractors of coalition operations. Gen. Dwight D. Eisenhower,
who led during the Second World War what was one of the most successful coalition military

120
Wayne A. Silkett, Alliance and Coalition Warfare, Parameters, Vol. XXIII, No. 2, (Summer
1993), p. 83.
77

efforts in modern times and who is considered something of a paragon of coalition leadership
was nevertheless a scathing critic of coalition operations: History testifies to the ineptitude
of coalitions in waging war. Allied failures have been so numerous and their inexcusable
blunders so common that professional soldiers had long discounted the possibility of effective
allied action . . .
121
British military disdain for coalition operations has historically matched
that of other countries. Maj Gen Sir Reginald Clare Hart, in his Reflections on the Art of War
published in 1901, maintained that allied armies seldom fight well together; there are always
discords, dissensions, and jealousies. The counsels and interests of allies are so divergent that
concerted action and loyal co-operation are almost impossible.
122

Despite this military pessimism, coalition military operations have for the British
Army been historically ubiquitous and since the end of the Second World War less
discretionary and more an operational way-of-life. The British success in meeting the
challenges of coalition operations has been underpinned by flexibility and pragmatism as
exemplified by Field Marshal Sir William Slims observations on the coalition aspects of
high command during the Second World War:
Now, it is an extraordinary thing that you should meet with so much opposition
from allies. Allies, altogether, are really very extraordinary people. It is
astonishing how obstinate they are, how parochially minded, how ridiculously
sensitive to prestige and how wrapped up in obsolete political ideas. It is equally
astonishing how they fail to see how broad-minded you are, how clear your
picture is, how up-to-date you are and how cooperative and big-hearted you are.
It is extraordinary. But let me tell you, when you feel like that about allies and
you have even worse allies than the British, believe me when you feel like that,
just remind yourself of two things. First you are an ally too, and all allies look
just the same. If you walk to the other side of the table, you will look just like that

121
Dwight D. Eisenhower, Crusade in Europe, London: William Heineman Limited, 1948, p. 6.
122
Maj Gen Sir Reginald Clare Hart, Reflections on the Art of War, London: William Clowes and
Sons, Limited, 1901, p. 141.
78

to the fellow sitting opposite. Then the next thing to remember is that there is
only one thing worse than having allies that is not having allies.
123

Field Marshall Slims last point, that on balance it is preferable to have coalition
partners on an operation than not, is key and requires more elaboration. British military
doctrine provides three reasons why it is desirable to embark on coalition operations and the
advantages they bring to the United Kingdom. The capstone joint doctrine publication JDP 01
Campaigning, states that . . . the commitment by multiple nations to contribute military
forces in order to accomplish agreed goals brings 3 advantages:
increased political muscle and enhanced legitimacy across the international
community;
shared risk and cost; and
increased military power and effectiveness.
124

The operational experience of General Sir Rupert Smith, who held coalition command
in Southeast Europe in the 1990s, echoed many of the themes found in British military
doctrine:
We enter into these arrangements for a number of reasons: we need more forces,
or more space; we want the legitimacy of numbers; we want to spread the risk
of failure, to resource, of responsibility; and we all want a seat at the table.
125

Coalition Operations: Doctrine and Problems of Cohesion and Command

With the increasing standardisation of military terminology due to long-standing
relationships between allied states, such as those in NATO, it is possible to find widely-
accepted definitions of key concepts found in doctrine. Nevertheless, some distinctive

123
Field Marshal Sir William Slim, Higher Command in War, Military Review, Vol. LXX, No. 5,
(May 1990), p. 12.
124
Joint Doctrine Publication 01 (JDP01) Campaigning, 2
nd
Edition, The Development, Concepts and
Doctrine Centre, Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, 21 December 2012, p. 4A-1.
125
Rupert Smith, The Utility of Force: The Art of War in the Modern World, London: Allen Lane,
2005, p. 301.
79

national terminology can persist. In United Kingdom military doctrine, a coalition is defined
as an ad-hoc arrangement between two or more nations for common action.
126
In contrast,
the United States Department of Defense describes a coalition as an arrangement between
two or more nations for common action.
127
A more elaborate version of the above two
definitions is provided by Andrew J. Pierre, Coalitions: Building and Maintenance. Pierre
defines a coalition as a grouping of like-minded states that agree on the need for joint action
on a specific problem at a particular time with no commitment to a durable relationship.
128

From the above definitions, it is clear that coalitions are formed for specific purposes and can
have limited durability and life-span.
Apart from differing nuances in meaning, coalition is not always used with enormous
precision and is often used interchangeably with the term alliance. To a greater or lesser
degree, politicians, soldiers and academics can all be guilty of this imprecision.
129
At least for
the United States the term alliance has a distinctive meaning. According to the U.S.
Department of Defense, an alliance is the relationship that results from a formal agreement
between two or more nations for broad, long-term objectives that further the common
interests of the members.
130

The key difference between a coalition and an alliance rests on its permanency. An
alliance is a formal standing arrangement which, at its core, has an obligation of collective
defence if one of its members is attacked. Thus, an alliance has a great deal more durability
with its treaty foundation, its developed institutions and its capacity for deterrence. The North
Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO) is an example of such an alliance. The multiplicity of
terms to describe military collaboration between different countries also embraces the

126
Joint Doctrine Publication 0-01.1, United Kingdom Supplement to the NATO Terminology
Database, 8
th
Edition, September 2011, p. C-3.
127
Joint Publication 1-02, Department of Defence Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms, 8
November 2010 (As Amended Through 15 August 2012), p. 47.
128
Andrew J. Pierre, Coalitions: Building and Maintenance. Gulf War, Kosovo, Afghanistan, War on
Terrorism, Washington D.C.: Institute for the Study of Diplomacy, 2002, p. 2.
129
For an academic example the interchangeable use of coalition and alliance see: Keith Neilson and
Roy A. Prete (eds.), Coalition Warfare: An Uneasy Accord, Waterloo, Ontario: Wilfred Laurier
130
Joint Publication 1-02, US Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms, p.
14.
80

expression multinational operations. According to the U.S. Defense Department a
multinational operation is defined as a collective term to describe military actions conducted
by forces of two or more nations, usually undertaken within the structure of a coalition or
alliance.
131
Unlike the definitions for coalition and alliance, the descriptor multinational
operations tells us nothing about its purpose but simply indicates that two or more countries
are conducting military activity together.
The above definitions highlight some significant conceptual and doctrinal differences.
Since the end of the Cold War such distinctions between alliance and coalition have been
breaking down with the two categories becoming applicable at the same time. For example,
in the NATO operation in Afghanistan, the NATO alliance is functioning in a strikingly ad
hoc way despite more than a half a century of NATO institutions and efforts to cultivate
allied integration and solidarity and to promote common aims. What this tells us is that when
an alliance engages in collective military activity that is discretionary and not driven by
collective self-defence, then alliances in those circumstances behave and indeed become
effectively a coalition, albeit one with a permanent address. Despite these contradictions, all
of these concepts have the shared common feature of indicating the differing ways in which
military collaboration between states can be understood.
As doctrine is meant to be a starting point to indicate how armed services fight and
provide a guide to training, what doctrine exists on military coalitions? In the United
Kingdom, there is no specific and discrete doctrine for coalition operations. At the national
level, British military doctrine weaves into the fabric of capstone joint doctrine publications
such as JDP 01 Campaigning or the Armys ADP Operations discussion of the factors

131
Ibid., p. 210.
81

shaping coalition operations.
132
The British armed services can also draw on international
efforts to produce doctrine-like aide memoirs for coalition operations. Collaborative efforts
such as the ABCA group (America, Britain, Canada and Australia) have resulted in the
creation of an international body that has produced guidance for coalition operations.
133
One
of the most important ideas to come out of this doctrinal development has been the idea of
unity of purpose and unity of effort. The NATO Glossary of Terms and Definitions
defines unity of effort in the following way: in military operations, coordination and
cooperation among all actors in order to achieve a common goal.
134
This idea may be critical
to making coalition operations work but it rows against one of the central tenets of military
life the idea of unity of command. General H. Norman Schwarzkopf, who commanded one
of the most diverse coalition operations during the first Gulf War in 1991, a conflict in which
the United States made the overwhelmingly dominant military contribution to coalition
operations, accepted that unity of command was not possible in this instance in order to
achieve military success:
I agreed that for the alliance to have a prayer of working, we needed a hybrid
system like the one wed used in Vietnam, where Americans had fought under
American commanders, South Vietnamese under South Vietnamese commanders,
and the actions of the armies were coordinated at the very top. Though this
approach violated an age-old principle of warfare called unity of command, Id
seen it in action, and I knew I could make it work even better in the Gulf than it
had in Vietnam.
135

For an army taking part in a coalition military operation it has to overcome a number
of challenges. At the strategic and operational levels of war, the problem faced is one of

132
Joint Doctrine Publication 01 (JDP01) Campaigning, 2
nd
Edition, The Development, Concepts and
Doctrine Centre, Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, 21 December 2012 and Army Doctrine
Publication (ADP) Operations, Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, 1 November 2010.
133
ABCA Coalition Operations Handbook, 4
th
Edition, ABCA Publication 332, 14 April 2008.
134
AAP-06 NATO Glossary of Terms and Definitions (English and French), Edition 2012 Version 2,
NATO Standardization Agency, 2012, p. 2-U-1.
135
General H. Norman Schwarzkopf, It Doesnt Take a Hero, London: Bantam Press, 1992, p. 313.
82

exercising control or influence over objectives and the course of military operations. The
efforts to achieve unity of purpose, unity of effort or unity of command are shaped by
the distribution of military power in a coalition operation. Traditionally, participants in
coalition operations have had to contend with either horizontal or vertical power
relationships. The distribution of military power is an important, indeed, paramount factor in
any coalition. In a horizontal coalition operation, a few roughly equal major military
contributors dominate decision-making and coordinate operations in a partnership
characterized by consensual decision-making. The British-French (Russian and US) coalition
during the First World War is a good example of the horizontal military coalition structure.
A vertical coalition structure sees one very large military contributor having the dominant
voice over all the other coalition members due to the size of their military contribution.
Differences in power and influence among coalition partners means that smaller partners
[can] feel bullied or neglected and larger, dominating partners complain of inequitably
shared risks and burdens.
136

Since the end of the Cold War, the British armed forces have regularly participated in
coalition military operations as a junior partner to the United States. For a junior partner on a
coalition military operation, achieving a level of influence over objectives and decision-
making in order to realise its national interests becomes the critical challenge. On the face of
things, the potential for sustaining national interest and operational influence can be low
given disparities in military contribution. The junior partner, however, is not completely
disarmed in seeking influence within a military coalition. In coalition operations the sources
of influence include things such as the reliability and loyalty of the junior partner to the
dominant military contributor, the effectiveness of the junior partners military contribution
and the interoperability of its forces. Not all of the levers of influence are positive ones;

136
Silkett, Alliance and Coalition Warfare, p. 80.
83

historically the military contingents of junior partners are given a veto over decisions or
limitations of participation by their national governments. Thus, caveats to military
participation exist where national contingents indicate what they are unwilling to undertake.
The caveats of some NATO members in Afghanistan are a good contemporary illustration.
137

In extremis, a national component commander will deploy the red card in the heat of an
operation. Typically, national contingent commanders possess in their national directives the
ability to refer orders given by the dominant coalition partner to national command
authorities if such an order may jeopardise the safety of their command or contravene
national policy. Moreover, the size of a national contingent does not affect the reality of
caveats and red cards. For example, New Zealand deployed during the Malayan Emergency
an SAS squadron with a directive replete with caveats on the squadrons employment in
internal security operations.
138

For coalition operations to be cohesive and effective and to overcome the in-built
centrifugal influence of national priorities and interests there is no prescribed doctrinal
formula to guide their design and employment. At the strategic and operational levels,
however, one can nevertheless identify areas where coalition partners must reach agreement
in order to minimise differences and be operationally effective. As Jeffrey Grey has argued,
there are five basic operational features of coalition warfare, and agreement must be reached
in these areas:
! Strategic Policy resource allocation and priorities at the operational level.
! Command of Forces in the field.
! Combat Effectiveness.
! Logistic Questions.

137
Nathan Hodge, US General Sees Undeclared Caveats in Afghanistan, Janes Defence Weekly,
30 May 2007, p. 7.
138
Christopher Pugsley, From Emergency to Confrontation: The New Zealand Armed Forces in
Malaya and Borneo 1949-1966, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003, pp. 372-73.
84

! Financing of the military effort.
139

Strategic policy is centrally about the need to establish common goals and the integration
of the political, military and diplomatic lines of the operation. As Maj Gen Roger Lane has
noted regarding the challenge of strategic policy for coalition operations: it is not unusual for
objectives to be broadly defined, but extremely challenging.
140
Command of forces sits
astride a critical crossroads between the quest for unity of command and the preservation of
national prerogative on a coalition operation. Compatible doctrine and planning processes,
training, cultural awareness, liaison officers, and national representation on central staffs can
mitigate strains related to questions of command of forces on operation. A good example of
how problems of command can be mitigated against in a coalition context can be seen by the
British approach in the First Gulf War. General Sir Peter de la Billiere described the
command challenges he faced in the following way:
The problem facing the British was how to integrate our forces and exercise
command and control . . . I was given the authority to place them, when required,
under the tactical control of the US for specific operations. . . I had to be sure,
however, that I was in a position to influence their use.
141

General de la Billiere found a solution in embedding British officers in all levels of
operational planning and command. These officers received permission to wear American
uniforms and in one instance a British brigadier became a Lt Colonel to facilitate his
integration into a US staff. In the end, there were about 100 British officers from all three
services in various key positions in the US Command system.
142
Differing levels of combat
effectiveness are amongst the most vexing areas to be managed on a coalition operation.

139
Jeffrey Grey, The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War, Manchester: Manchester University
Press, 1988, p.6.
140
Roger Lane, The Command, Leadership and Management Challenges of Contemporary
Multinational Command, RUSI Journal, (December 2006), p. 30.
141
General Sir Peter de la Billiere, The Gulf Conflict: Planning and Execution, RUSI Journal,
(Winter 1991), p. 9.
142
Ibid. For a more detailed account of the arrangements see, General Sir Peter de la Billiere, Storm
Command: A Personal Account of the Gulf War, London: Harper Collins, 1992.
83

Stronger contributors may feel that they are carrying too much of a burden and weaker
performances of partners can undermine the effort. Moreover, it does not automatically
follow that the largest contributors are the most militarily effective. Conferring operational
latitude and recognizing how to recognise weaknesses and apply strengths of national
contingents is key to getting the best results out of diversity in combat effectiveness. The last
two points on logistics and finance are highly technical questions but are vitally important for
agreement to be reached for the day-to-day functioning of any coalition operation.
If the strategic and operational levels of coalition operations are about control and
influence over objectives and operational decision-making in order to establish cohesion in
operations, then the tactical level is about integration and effectiveness at the sharp end of
battle. Tactical integration at the battalion level and below is amongst the most challenging
aspects of a coalition military operation. At the tactical level, questions of interoperability of
communications, spare parts and ammunition, tactics, techniques and procedures all have a
huge impact. The differences in military culture, quality of training, doctrine and language
barriers all shape whether or not different armies can operate together at the lowest tactical
levels on the battlefield. Because of the very lethal consequences of failure at the tactical
level, historically most armies have spurned integration at this level, preferring to operate
autonomously from other coalition partners. Focusing tactically at the national level and
operating in a discreet geographical area has been the traditional means of avoiding the
complexities and risks of tactical integration in a coalition military operation. While the
cultivation of interoperability through organisations like NATO and the widespread influence
of American military doctrine and practice militate against the risks inherent in tactical level
integration, armies are inherently suspicious and wary of working closely with even the most
compatible of partners. Indeed, where it does occur it is only with the most trusted partners.
An example of this can be seen in the close tactical integration between Estonian and Danish
86

units on operations in southern Afghanistan, particularly with the latter at Musa Qala.
143
As
the British experience on operations in Helmand in Afghanistan indicates, tactical level
integration may be more common in the future, requiring greater emphasis on compatibility
and interoperability.
The attributes of command and leadership exercised on a coalition operation are the
things that ultimately will bring success or failure to a given operation. Given the nature of
coalition operations, the qualities of command and leadership required of the coalition
commander can challenge leadership models cultivated within national armies.
144
Silkett
argues that for a holder of coalition command to be effective, it is necessary for leadership to
be exercised in a more accommodating way:
Although unity of command is important to coalition military success, this does not
necessarily mean, and historically it has usually not meant, full compelling authority
over allied commanders and formations. Authority, therefore, tends to be collegial,
and a successful coalition leader will be persuasive rather than coercive.
145

Expeditionary Operations

Expeditionary operations are defined as, 'Military operations which can be initiated at
short notice, consisting of forward deployed, or rapidly deployable, self-sustaining forces

143
Anthony King, The Transformation of Europes Armed Forces: From the Rhine to Afghanistan,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011, pp. 257-259.
144
Col Larry M. Forster, Coalition Leadership Imperatives, Military Review, November-December
2000, p. 58
145
Silkett, Alliance and Coalition Warfare, p. 79. The need for persuasion is strongly emphasized
among many officers who have exercised command in coalition operations. See for example, John
Kiszely, Coalition Command in Contemporary Operations, Whitehall Report 1-08, The Royal
United Services Institute, 2008, p. 17. Similarly, these qualities of leadership are stressed in UK
doctrine. See, Joint Doctrine Publication 01 (JDP01) Campaigning, 2
nd
Edition, p. 4A-2.
87

tailored to achieve a clearly-stated objective in a foreign country'.
146
In conducting these
operations the British stress that
An expeditionary mindset (go anywhere, at any time, for any task) should underpin
individual and collective ethos. This purposeful attitude should be reinforced by a
preparedness to fight, personal resilience, a philosophy of clear, centralised intent and
properly-resourced decentralised execution: professional mobility supported by
suitable terms and conditions of service; and the ability to project force strategically
and quickly, and then sustain it. Expeditionary is not necessarily the same as rapid
response. An expeditionary approach should have an element of continuous
engagement in order to anticipate, understand or prevent conflict, as well as respond
to it.
147

In setting out the intellectual demands of these operations and stressing the concept of
an 'expeditionary ethos' ADP Operations highlights that for the British Army expeditionary
operations are a 'mind set' and not a formal doctrine.
148
This is paralleled in the
complementary capstone doctrines of the Royal Navy BR 1806 British Maritime Doctrine
(3rd Edition) and Royal Air Force AP 3000 British Air and Space Power Doctrine (4th
Edition).
149
Under this overarching concept the practicalities of conducting these operations
are detailed in British Joint Doctrine Publications. The keystone document is JDP-01
Campaigning. This sets out the principles of joint campaigning, providing guidance to a
joint force commander to help him understand the operational level of campaigns in which he
plans, conducts and sustains military operations as part of a comprehensive approach'.
150
This
is underpinned by the Functional Doctrine publications, JDP 3-00 Campaign Execution, JDP
4-00 Joint Logistics and JDP 5-00 Campaign Planning, that deal with the operational level of
war.

146
This is the most recently published official definition of expeditionary operations. See, Joint
Doctrine Publication 01.1 (JDP 0-01.1), United Kingdom Glossary of Joint and Multinational Terms
and Definitions, 7
th
Edition, The Development, Concepts and Doctrine Centre, Ministry of Defence,
United Kingdom, June 2006, p. E-9.
147
ADP Operations, pp. 2-8.
148
This stands in contrast to the United States Marine Corps which as early as 1998 had issued MCDP,
Expeditionary Operations.
149
In British defence doctrine 'capstone' documents are the single service doctrines that guide and inform lower
level doctrine.
150
ADP Operations, pp. 2-7
88

Maritime Power Projection
151

As an island nation Britain has historically been forced to use the sea to deploy her
armed forces in support of national policy outside the United Kingdom. The base concept for
these operations is that of maritime power projection. This is defined as 'the threat or use of
maritime combat capabilities at global range to achieve effects in support of national policy
objectives; usually to influence events on land. It exploits sea control to achieve access to
littoral waters from where force can be threatened or projected ashore using amphibious
forces, organic aircraft, land attack weapons and special forces'.
152
Sea Control represents 'the
condition in which one has freedom of action to use the sea for one's own purposes in
specified areas and for specified periods of time and, where necessary, to deny or limit its use
to the enemy'.
153
Maritime power projection represents the Royal Navy's contribution to the
United Kingdom's expeditionary capabilities.
Deployment of ground and air units ashore in landing or amphibious operations
depends on logistic support from naval and merchant vessels in the area of operations, rather
than from home bases. Transportation at sea also remains the most efficient method of
deploying and sustaining substantial expeditionary forces. In conjunction with the fact that an
estimated 80% of the world's population lives within 300 miles of coastal waters (technically
referred to as the littoral region), sea power is central to the conduct of expeditionary warfare.
Seaborne expeditions can be projected ashore by two basic methods. If deploying to a

151
For a more detailed consideration of themes considered in this section see, Chapter 3 'Principles
Governing the Use of Maritime Power' in BR1806 The Fundamentals of British Maritime Doctrine
(3rd Edition), Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, 2004. It should be noted that unlike the 1st
Edition (1995) there is no longer a section devoted to Maritime Expeditionary Operations as a distinct
activity and as BR1806 has migrated to the realm of joint doctrine its successor continues this pattern.
See, Joint Doctrine Publication 0-10 (JDP 0-10), British Maritime Doctrine, The Development,
Concepts and Doctrine Centre, Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, August 2011.
152
BR1806, (3rd Edition), p. 45.
153
Ibid., p. 41.
89

friendly state then forces can simply be landed at secure ports and beaches. Landing on a
hostile shore, potentially in the face of enemy opposition, requires an amphibious landing.
During the Pacific War (1941-45) U.S. Marine forces conducted operations thousands of
miles from their principal bases in the United States. Consequently, to achieve their specific
missions they were dependent upon ship borne supplies that accompanied them to their
objective. The scale of these operations was immense. When V Amphibious Corps invaded
the island of Iwo Jima in February 1945 the Fifth Marine Division (13,000 strong) was
provided with sufficient logistic support to feed the town of Columbus, Ohio (population
302,000) for a month and enough cigarettes to supply every marine with twenty a day for
eight months.
154

Sea Power and Sea Control

In mounting such operations, as noted, sea control is an essential prerequisite. The
principal method for ensuring this is by exercising sea power through the threat or actual
deployment and use of naval forces. What is termed command of the sea is not concerned
with attaining an 'absolute' control but upon establishing a 'working' control in the intended
area of operations. Sea Control is therefore 'the condition that exists when there is freedom of
action to use an area of the sea for one's own purpose for a period of time and, if necessary,
deny its use to an opponent'.
155
To achieve this in a hostile area it is the task of naval forces to
suppress enemy air and naval forces to protect the vulnerable landing forces. It is often the
case that enemy air and naval forces that have previously avoided action may offer battle in
an attempt to oppose an amphibious landing. The level of naval forces deployed and the

154
G. W. Garand and T. R, Strobridge, Western Pacific Operations, vol. 4, History of United States
Marine Corps Operations in World War II, Washington, 1971, p. 480.
155
JDP 0-10 British Maritime Doctrine, pp. 2-10.
90

actions they undertake in support of expeditionary operations will vary according to the
nature of the operation. In Peace Support operations naval forces can be required to land
amphibious and other ground forces and provide logistic support. It is unlikely that they will
have to undertake combat operations to secure control of the surrounding sea area though
naval gunfire and air support may be provided to forces ashore. During operations in Sierra
Leone in 1999 (Operation Palliser) a Royal Navy Task Group provided potential support to
British land forces with aircraft from the light carrier HMS Illustrious. Royal Marines of 42
Commando operating from the assault ship HMS Ocean carried out practice landings as a
demonstration of British capabilities to rebel forces. Other situations may require naval forces
to establish control of the sea by defeating enemy naval forces in combat. Therefore,
expeditionary operations often run in parallel with operations to secure a 'working' control of
the sea. In the Falklands conflict (1982) Royal Navy forces secured control of the waters
around the islands by forcing the Argentine Navy into port after the loss of the light cruiser
General Belgrano and foiling the Argentine Air Force's intention of defeating the amphibious
landings at San Carlos Water.

Amphibious Operations
156

156
A more comprehensive doctrinal consideration of this form of operation can be found in ATP-8(B),
Amphibious Operations, vol. 1 NATO, July 2004 and vol. 2, NATO, September 2007. See also, BRd
9400 Amphibious Forces Handbook, vol. 1 (Tactical Doctrine) and vol. 2 (Amphibious Tactics,
Techniques, Procedures, Force Structures and Platform Characteristics), April 2011. Further reading
on historical case studies can be found in the comprehensive range of studies in T. Lovering (ed),
Amphibious Assault Manoeuvre from the Sea: Amphibious Operations from the Last Century,
(Royal Navy, 2005).
91

An amphibious operation is 'a military operation launched from the sea by a naval and
landing force (LF) embarked in ships, with the principal purpose of projecting the LF ashore
tactically into an environment ranging from permissive to hostile'.
157
Amphibious operations
are generally joint, and occasionally combined, in nature. They represent the most ambitious
form of operation that armed forces can undertake. Weather, tides and the nature of the
landing beaches can all complicate the problems of transporting forces to, and landing upon,
an enemy coastline. In the 1930s the United States Marine Corps identified six fundamental
principles that required consideration for a successful operation. These were set out in the
doctrinal publication FTP-167 'Fleet Landing Manual' (1938) which has formed the basis of
all subsequent manuals for amphibious operations.
158
The six principles identified were:
command arrangements; naval gunfire; air support; ship-to-shore movement; securing the
beachhead; loading and logistical matter. These factors apply to varying degrees to the many
types of amphibious operations which can be undertaken: demonstration; raids; assault;
withdrawal.
159
Since the 1950s the use of air manoeuvre operations has come to hold a
dominant place in amphibious operations as seen during the Royal Marines assault on the Al
Faw peninsula in the 2003 invasion of Iraq.
160

Air Power

157
ATP-8(B) Amphibious Operations, vol. 1, p. 1-1.
158
United States Navy, FTP-167 Landing Operations Manual, Washington, 1938. This rare volume
can be viewed and downloaded on-line at www.ibiblio.org/hyperwar. See also, A. R . Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps, New York, 1991, chapter 12, for the
development of this manual.
159
For definitions see ATP-8(B) Amphibious Operations, vol.1, pp. 1-3.
160
For an account of operations in Iraq, 2003, see J. M. F. Robinson, 'Iraq; Operation TELIC, March
2003; Al Faw Landings - Post Modern Amphibious Operations?', in Lovering, pp. 451-64.
92

Air power is defined by the Royal Air Force (RAF) as 'The ability to project power
from the air and space to influence the behaviour of people or the course of events'.
161
The
core characteristics of air power are defined as: speed; reach; height. These make air power
highly agile, enabling deployment and concentration of forces rapidly at the strategic,
operational and tactical levels.
162
The RAF details four key roles for air and space power, all
of which are critical for its contribution to expeditionary operations. These are: control of the
air and space; air mobility; intelligence and situational awareness; attack.
163
As with sea
power, control of the air is the fundamental basis for implementing other air roles. Critically,
it is arguably fundamental in all aspects of expeditionary operations because it 'enables
freedom of manoeuvre in all of the Service environments: air, land and maritime'.
164

Consequently air power can often be the quickest method for deploying expeditionary forces
in a crisis through the use of Air Mobility that 'enables forces to be moved and sustained
worldwide across the entire spectrum of operations. It provides rapid and flexible options to
military planners and national and international governments, allowing rapid responses to
crisis situations globally'.
165

The concept consists of six sub-sets: Air Lift; Air to Air Refueling; Airborne
Operations; Special Air Operations; Aerial Delivery; Aeromedical evacuation.
166
Deploying
forces in this manner has several disadvantages. Forces can often require host nation support
to provide airfields, or access to similar facilities in neighbouring states in order to acquire
entry to an Area of Operations. A move over great distance can require the use of staging
bases en route again reliant upon friendly states. Such support, or permission to over fly

161
British Air and Space Power Doctrine, AP 3000, 4
th
Edition, Ministry of Defence, United
Kingdom, 2009, p .7.
162
Ibid., p. 16-17 for definitions of these factors.
163
Ibid., Chapter 3 'The Four Fundamentals of Air and Space Power', pp. 37-60.
164
Ibid., p.38.
165
Ibid., p. 44.
166
Ibid., p. 44-45
93

states territory, cannot always be relied upon. During Operation Palliser (Sierra Leone,
2000) British forces relied upon access to French airbases at Dakar in North Africa as a
staging post. Even with access to airbases Air Lift can only deliver light forces and limited
logistic needs. The delivery of heavy equipment and large-scale logistic support remains
dependent upon sea lift. If access to a theatre is denied then an airborne operation might be
mounted to secure entry. Forces that conduct airborne operations differ from those that are
air-transported in that they possess the ability to immediately fight, seize and hold objectives
on their own. The employment of an airborne force is restricted by their light armament,
meaning that they are high-risk, high gain undertakings and therefore often require rapid
reinforcement, or relief, by regular forces deployed by Sea or Air Lift.
167

A British Tradition of Expeditionary Operations?

The United Kingdom has a long historical experience of mounting expeditionary
operations. This stems from the obvious fact that as an island nation Britain's ability to
project power requires such a capability. Historical experience has not meant that the British
have developed a strong innate military tradition and culture or organisation for expeditionary
operations. British experience has proved erratic and largely transitory, with lessons
consistently having to be re-learnt.
During the wars of the late seventeenth to mid-eighteenth centuries, in which Britain
emerged as one of the great European powers, the conduct of expeditionary and associated
amphibious operations produced mixed results. Lack of formal doctrine alongside forces
specifically organised, equipped and trained for such operations meant that success depended
upon inter-service and personal relations, as well as an enemy who was largely unprepared.

167
Ibid., p. 45
94

This situation changed from the 1740s when organisational and doctrinal issues were
systematically addressed.
168
The result was a series of outstanding expeditionary operations.
This institutional knowledge was allowed to wane after the end of the Napoleonic
Wars in 1815. Most notable was the scrapping of the Royal Navy's transport fleet created in
the 1790s as a permanent and dedicated expeditionary capability, rather than the hiring of
unsuitable merchant vessels.
169
As a result, British effectiveness in the conduct of
expeditionary operations again became erratic. The culmination of this institutional malaise
came at the landings on Gallipoli in 1915. Although forces were successfully landed, the
operation revealed severe shortcomings in all aspects of mounting this type of operation.
Gallipoli cast a long and distorting influence over amphibious operations during the period
1919-39, with many arguing that opposed landings were unfeasible. The extent of these
views has been exaggerated. The United States Marine Corps developed a highly
sophisticated landing doctrine that provided the basis of all Allied operations during the
Second World War, and remains a core doctrine to the present. British developments were
more modest, but these were the result of budgetary limitations as opposed to lack of interest
or belief in the utility of amphibious operations.
170

After 1945 the capabilities developed during war were allowed to atrophy with the
result that during the 1956 Suez Crisis, although an amphibious expeditionary force did
successfully land in Egypt, it took months to organise and revealed serious operational and
tactical inadequacies. The British reaction to this came in the 1956 Sandy's Defence Review
that initiated a brief return to the Napoleonic era's idea of a dedicated expeditionary force.

168
See R. Harding, Amphibious Operations in the Eighteenth Century, chapter 4 'Amphibious Warfare',
Royal Historical Society, Boydell Press, 1991, for the best overview of this period.
169
N. A. M. Rodger, The Command of the Ocean: A Naval History of Britain, 1649-1815, London,
2004, p. 423.
170
R. Harding, 'Amphibious Warfare, 1930-39', and I. Speller, 'Amphibious Operations, 1945-1998',
in R. Harding, ed., The Royal Navy, 1930-2000; Innovation and Defence, Frank Cass, 2005, pp. 42-48
and pp. 213-45.
93

This proved short-lived and from the late 1960s onwards British capabilities were gradually
reduced in light of withdrawal from empire and a foreign policy focus on Europe, NATO in
particular. By 1982 the proposed cuts to the Royal Navy in Defence Secretary John Nott's
review 'The Way Forward', appeared to herald the end of Britain's ability to mount anything
but punitive expeditionary operations. Certainly the Chief of Staff to Commandant General
Royal Marines took this view in a formal paper, choosing to comment in whimsical verse:

If trouble brews in distant lands
We heave a sigh and wring out hands
Forgotten are the lessons learnt
(Afraid of getting fingers burnt)
171

The British Revival of Expeditionary Operations

Although the Falklands conflict stayed execution of Nott's cuts, it was developments
in the Far East and more critically the ending of the Cold War between NATO and the
Warsaw Pact that were seen as the catalyst for international instability. From the NATO
perspective the 1990-1 Gulf conflict and the collapse of the former Yugoslavia seemed to
give substance to this claim. In addition, the end of the Cold War released western powers
from the strategic straightjacket of NATO commitments in Europe. This new potential was
complemented by, and served to reinforce, an apparently re-invigorated United Nations in the

171
Michael Clapp and Ewan Southby-Tailyour, Amphibious Assault Falklands; The Battle for San
Carlos, Barnley: Leo Cooper, 1996, p. 362.
96

wake of the successful 1990-91 Gulf conflict with Iraq. In Britain this new situation was
reinforced by the coming to power of the Labour Party in 1997. Imbued with a strong
internationalist ideology that Britain should be a 'force for good', New Labour's determination
that Britain play an active and assertive role in preserving international security meant that
the use of military force was seen as a viable, and increasingly in some circles desirable,
method for resolving disputes. These trends were reinforced in Britain and broadened to
include NATO in the wake of the 11 September 2001 attacks on the United States that saw
the start of the so-called 'Global War Against Terror' and the subsequent campaigns in Iraq
and Afghanistan.
These political developments saw British defence policy shift from a NATO emphasis
to one focused increasingly upon expeditionary operations outside the UK-NATO area.
Tentative steps were taken under 'Options for Change' and the 1996 Defence Review. These
saw the creation of the Joint Service Command and Staff College and Permanent Joint
Headquarters. In general terms the changes were modest tinkering; this was acknowledged in
the 1998 Strategic Defence Review and the follow-up paper 'SDR: A New Chapter'.
172
These
policies were intended to restructure the armed forces so that 'Our future military capability
will therefore be built around a pool of powerful and versatile units from all three services
which would be available for operations at short notice'.
173
Central to this was the creation of
the Joint Rapid Reaction Force (JRRF) designed as a pool of resources that Permanent Joint
Headquarters (PJHQ) could draw upon to create a force specifically tailored to a particular
mission. Notable was the commitment to the building of a dedicated Amphibious Task Group
of assault and support shipping and two 65,000-ton aircraft carriers as the core of British
expeditionary capabilities.

172
Strategic Defence Review, (London, HMSO, 1998).
173
Op cit., p. 23.
97

The 2010 Strategic Defence and Security Review reaffirmed the notion of British
commitment to expeditionary operations in support of Britain's allies, the international
community and in wider British global strategic interests.
174
Yet this commitment must be set
against the impact of budgetary retrenchment that has resulted in the short and medium term
degrading of British expeditionary capabilities in terms of maritime power projection. The
three exiting light carriers are in various stages of scrapping, de-commissioning and laying
up. The first of the two new carriers, HMS Queen Elizabeth is not due to enter service until
2016, and will then be laid up when HMS Prince of Wales commissions in 2018, making
only one carrier immediately available. The scrapping of the Joint Harrier Force and delays
and confusion over the replacement Joint Strike Fighter alongside the critical loss of
personnel experienced at carrier-air operations means that 2025 could be the earliest date that
a balanced independent British maritime expeditionary capability can be restored. As often in
its history, Britain is again attempting to balance overseas political commitments against
budgetary retrenchment that has serious implications for the expeditionary capabilities of its
armed forces.
175

British Coalition and Expeditionary Operations in the 21
st
Century

Whatever the shortfalls that may beset British expeditionary capabilities or the
operational challenges in working with other armed forces, events in the 21
st
century only
suggest that the British armed forces are going to continue to be engaged in both coalition
and expeditionary operations. In UK policy terms this is exemplified by coalition and

174
Securing Defence in and Age of Uncertainty; The Strategic Defence and Security Review, London:
HMSO, 2010.
175
See D. Brown chapter 3 'British Defence Policy' in Britain's Security Architecture, Commissioning Course
Handbook, vol. 4, Department of Defence and International Affairs, RMAS, 2011, pp. 51-86. See also, NAM
Rodgers, The Command of the Ocean, passim, for this debate and its ideological as much as practical matters
between 1649 and 1815.
98

expeditionary operations explicitly coming together within the framework of the Anglo-
French Combined Joint Expeditionary Force (CJEF) created in November 2010. The purpose
of the CJEF will beto conduct offensive and defensive operations on land, in the air, and
at sea, wherever UK and French national security interests are aligned.
176
While the CJEF
does not alter the fact that the British armed forces will continue to work alongside the
military forces of the United States and other allies, CJEF is an important development
because it underscores the view that such structures and co-operative mechanisms will be
necessary to facilitate operations that are coalition, expeditionary and of growing complexity.
On the basis of recent trends, coalition operations have had an ever-increasing number of
members and have moved into such demanding military activity as counterinsurgency.
177

Linked to this is a further trend for coalition integration to take place at the tactical level but
with coalition members bringing to it a wide range of rules of engagement on the use of
force and other issues.
178
If the past is any guide, then these operations can occur at short
notice and can be of many differing scales and durations. As in the cases of the Suez
operation in 1956 or the Falklands in 1982, the adaptability and agility of the British armed
forces will be critical. However much more capability is desired or required, the armed
services will inevitably go to war with the capabilities they have at hand, with an array of
coalition partners, and will have to manage the risk that confronts them.

Suggested Reading

176
Combined Joint Expeditionary Force (CJEF) User Guide, The Development, Concepts and Doctrine Centre,
Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, November 2012, pp. 1-2.
177
Lt Col Ian Hope, Coalition Counter-Insurgency Warfare in Afghanistan, in, Bernd Horn and
Emily Spencer (eds.), No Easy Task: Fighting in Afghanistan, Toronto: Dundurn, 2012, p. 83, and
Kiszely, Coalition Command in Contemporary Operations, p. 4.
178
Jan Angstrom and Jan Willem Honig, Regaining Strategy: Small Powers, Strategic Culture, and
Escalation in Afghanistan, The Journal of Strategic Studies, Vol. 35, No, 5, (October 2012), pp. 663-
87.
99

Beaufre, Andre. The Suez Expedition 1956. London: Faber and Faber, 1969.

Clapp, Michael and Southby-Tailyour, Ewan. Amphibious Assault Falklands: The Battle for
San Carlos, Barnsley: Leo Cooper, 1996.

Fergusson, Bernard. The Watery Maze: The Story of Combined Operations, London: Collins,
1961.

Garand, G.W. and Strobridge, T. R. Western Pacific Operations, vol. 4: History of United
States Marine Corps Operations in World War II, Washington: US Government
Printing Office, 1971.

Grey, Jeffrey. The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War. Manchester: Manchester
Harding, R. Amphibious Operations in the Eighteenth Century. London: Royal Historical
Society, Boydell Press, 1991.
Jackson, Robert. Suez 1956: Operation Musketeer. London: Ian Allen, 1980.

Kiszely, John, Coalition Command in Contemporary Operations, Whitehall Report 1-08,
London: The Royal United Services Institute, 2008.

Ladd, James. The Royal Marines, 1919-1980: An Authorised History. London: Janes
Information Group, 1980.

Lane, Roger. The Command, Leadership and Management Challenges of Contemporary
Multinational Command, RUSI Journal, (December 2006).

Lovering, T., ed., Amphibious Assault Manoeuvre from the Sea: Amphibious Operations
from the Last Century, Seafarer Books, 2007.

Maurer, Martha. Coalition Command and Control. Washington D. C.: National Defence
University, 1996.
Millett, A. R. Semper Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps. New York:
Free Press, 1991.
Neilson, Keith, and Prete, Roy A., eds., Coalition Warfare: An Uneasy Accord. Waterloo,
Ontario: Wilfred Laurier University Press, 1983.
Pierre, Andrew J. Coalitions: Building and Maintenance: Gulf War, Kosovo, Afghanistan,
War on Terrorism. Washington D.C.: Institute for the Study of Diplomacy, 2002.
Showalter, Dennis E., ed., Future Wars: Coalition Operations in Global Strategy. Chicago:
Imprint Publications, 2002.
Silkett, Wayne A. Alliance and Coalition Warfare, Parameters, Vol. XXIII, No. 2,
(Summer 1993), pp. 74-85.
100

Speller, I. 'Amphibious Operations, 1945-1998', in R. Harding, ed., The Royal Navy, 1930-
2000: Innovation and Defence. London: Frank Cass, 2005.

Expeditionary Operations Case Studies

Operation Detachment:
The Invasion of Iwo Jima, 19 February-19 March 1945

On 3 October 1944 Admiral Chester W. Nimitz, Commander-in-Chief Pacific Fleet
and Commander Pacific Ocean Areas was instructed by the U.S. Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS)
to draw up plans for the seizure of one or more positions in the Bonin or Volcano Islands.
The objective chosen was Iwo Jima in the latter group. This eight square mile island of barren
sulphurous smelling rock and ash was to be secured for its airfields to support U.S. bomber
operations against mainland Japan, 350 miles to the north.
179
Operation Detachment
illustrates the complexity of joint amphibious operations and the ability of the United States
to project expeditionary forces over vast distances in the Second World War.
The plan for Operation Detachment consisted of three broad phases. First, air and
naval forces would bombard the island over a period of several months. In phase two naval
forces would conduct a three day preliminary bombardment. In phase three the island would
be assaulted across the eastern shore and secured in ten days by Major-General Harold
Schmidts 5th Amphibious Corps. The 4
th
and 5
th
Marine Divisions would land abreast on the
eastern beaches between Surabachi and the East Boat Basin, secure these objectives and then
wheel north and drive to the north coast. The 3
rd
Marine Division was originally held in

179
Later claims that Iwo Jima was seized as an emergency landing area for stricken B-2s and to
counter Japanese attacks on their bases in the Marianas are revealed as special pleading in hindsight.
See, War With Japan: The Advance to Japan, vol. 6, (London, HMSO, 1995), pp. 5 and 151, and, R.
S. Burrell, Breaking the Cycle of Iwo Jima Mythology: A Strategic Study of Operation Detachment,
Journal of Military History, vol. 68 (October 2004).
101

reserve ashore on Guam, but Commander Fleet Marine Force Pacific, Lieutenant-General
Holland M. Smith, concerned about the scale of Japanese defences, ordered it to be re-
deployed afloat off Iwo Jima.
By the time of the American landing on Iwo Jima in February 1945 Japanese
defences, commanded by Lieutenant-General Kuribayashi, comprised over 21,000 personnel,
361! 75mm guns, 65 ! 150mm mortars and over 200 ! 20-25mm anti-aircraft guns.
180

Anticipating the American intention to use massive firepower, Kuribayashi downgraded
beach defence and concentrated the bulk of his forces inland on two defence lines running
east-west to the south and north of Motayama No. 2 airfield. In the south a semi-independent
group occupied Mount Surabachi, a 550-foot eminence which dominated the landing zones.
Japanese forces constructed hundreds of strong-points reinforced with concrete and steel
doors and connected by tunnels to offset American firepower.
Preparatory bombardment of Iwo Jima began on 8 December 1944. Over the next 72
days United States Army Seventh Air Force and naval units hit Iwo Jima daily, delivering a
total 6,800 tons of bombs and nearly 22,000 five to sixteen inch naval shells.
181
Final pre-
invasion operations commenced on 16 February 1945 as Task Force 54 Gunfire and
Covering Force began fire missions to destroy Japanese positions and protect the
minesweepers. Between 16-18 February 14,250 tons of shells were fired, but the effects of
this bombardment proved as limited as the preceding attacks in light of the strength and
concealment of Japanese positions. Holland Smith and Schmidt had argued for a ten day
bombardment to ensure reduction of an estimated 450 Japanese positions but the Navy
refused on grounds of limited ammunition supply and an unwillingness to expose its
amphibious forces to attack whilst the covering force of fast carriers was attacking enemy air

180
G. W. Garand T. R. Strobridge, History of United States Marine Corps Operations in World War
II: Western Pacific Operations, vol. 4, Washington, D.C. 1968, pp. 453-4.
181
War With Japan, vol. 6, pp. 153-4.
102

power on Japan.
182
Both services held sound positions in terms of their own operational
requirements, but these did not, or could not be made, to complement each other to the
Marines satisfaction.
183

In the early hours of 19 February Task Force 53 carrying the Marines of 5
th

Amphibious Corps anchored off Iwo Jima. Joint Expeditionary Force commander Vice
Admiral Richmond Kelly Turner now assumed overall supervision. In all, 450 ships lay off
the island. As nearly 50,000 Marines ate a hearty breakfast at 0640, seven battleships, four
heavy cruisers, three light cruisers and ten destroyers opened fire, bringing to a crescendo the
bombardment begun eighty days previously. In the heaviest pre-H-Hour bombardment in
history they fired 38,500 shells of five to sixteen inch calibre.
184
At 0830hrs Turner signalled
Land the Landing Force. The final closely-choreographed stages of support for the troops
commenced as naval guns lifted their fire and aircraft attacked. Continuity of naval gunfire
closely coordinated with air strikes delivering rockets, bombs and napalm was achieved for
the first time in the war. The first wave of assault troops landed at H-Hour (0900hrs). One
minute previously the navy began a pre-timed rolling barrage inland predicated on the troops
expected rate of advance. At 0902 the second wave landed, followed by eight others at five-
minute intervals. This carefully organised assault plan put 9,000 troops ashore across a 3,000
yard front in 45 minutes. Cohesion was soon lost as Japanese defenders, having held their fire
until the Marines had advanced 200 yards inland through their concealed positions, opened
fire. Very quickly the advance was reduced to a crawl, ultimately falling short of the days
objectives.

182
E. Morison, Victory in the Pacific 1945, vol. 14, Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute Press, 2012, p.
13.
183
W. S. Bartley, Iwo Jima: Amphibious Epic, (Washington, 1968), pp.40-1.
184
Morison, Victory in the Pacific 1945, pp. 34-5.
103

Over the next six weeks, in the face of fanatical Japanese resistance, the advance
proved slow and chaotic. Iwo Jima was officially declared secure on 19 March. The fighting
can be viewed in three broad phases. In the first (20-23 February) a dual advance was
mounted. Advancing methodically, 4
th
and 5
th
Divisions cleared Airfield Number 1 and
Suribachi to reach their D-Day objective. The second phase (24 February-10 March) involved
breaking Kuribayashis main defences along the Motoyama plateau either side of Airfield
Number 2. The intensity of fighting forced Schmidt to commit the reserve 3
rd
Division,
justifying Holland Smiths decision to designate it as a floating reserve. In the third phase
(ending 19 March) a series of isolated pockets along the northern fringes of the island were
painstakingly eliminated.
Conquest of the island cost the Marines 5,931 dead and missing and 18,770 wounded.
Around 1,000 Japanese, too wounded to commit suicide, were taken prisoner. Holland
Smiths summary of the battle serves to emphasise the irrelevance of manoeuvre concepts to
Iwo Jima: It was an operation of one phase and one tactic. From the time the engagement
was joined until the mission was completed it was a matter of frontal assault maintained with
relentless pressure.
185
The success of the operation rested upon careful fulfilment of the six
principles of amphibious assault, as well as a superb logistics capability which supported an
expeditionary force over 500 miles from its nearest base and approximately 5,000 from the
United States. Perhaps the best illustration of the immense capability of the U.S. at this stage
of the war was the fact that the 5
th
Marines could be afforded the luxury of a packet of twenty
cigarettes for every man for eight months.
186

185
J. H. Alexander, Storm Landings; Epic Amphibious Landings in the Central Pacific, Annapolis
MD: Naval Institute Press, 1997, p. 126.
186
Garand and Strobridge, p.
104

Operation Musketeer
The Anglo-French Expedition to Egypt, 1956

The Suez Canal has been a strategically vital waterway for Britain since its
completion in 1869. With the establishment of independent Arab states in the Middle East in
the wake of the Second World War, the British position in the region went through a period
of fundamental change. The British presence in Egypt and the canal zone would be no
exception. A military coup in Egypt in July 1952 paved the way for the emergence of Abdel
Gamal Nasser, an Egyptian Army colonel who became leader and in due course president of
the country. Nasser was an Arab nationalist and his politics not only changed the situation in
Egypt but throughout the region. His regime would become a supporter of anti-colonial
insurgencies in the Arab world. By 1954, Britain agreed to withdraw its military forces from
Egypt in exchange for a treaty that preserved the business interests of the Anglo-French
company in running the canal and internationalized access to the waterway. Nasser, however,
courted both United States and Soviet support, and his political overtures to the Soviet Union
only served to alienate Britain and the United States. In order to support his political
ambitions, Nasser had to turn to the Soviet Union for assistance, receiving pledges of aid for
the Aswan Dam project and arms shipments. His next step would precipitate a major crisis.
On 26 July 1956, he nationalized the Suez Canal. For Britain, the Egyptian nationalisation of
the canal broke treaty commitments, impinged on important strategic interests and occurred
soon after the last British troops departed the Canal Zone. For France, the Egyptian seizure of
the canal hit French commercial interests in the waterway while Nasser was seen as a
regional problem, not least for his support to the insurgency against French rule in Algeria.
103

This mounting international crisis set the scene for the first major British coalition and
expeditionary operation since the end of the Second World War.
187

By early August 1956, Britain and France took the political decision to confront
Nasser and repossess the Suez Canal by military means. Britain and France were the two
principal allies, but Israel through French contacts became a secret third partner in the
military operations. With its military action against Egypt in the Sinai, Israel broadly
coordinated its action and provided a pretext for Anglo-French intervention in Egypt. From
the start, military planners would be beset by the lack of clear political objectives. Although
both Britain and France wanted to see Nasser ousted from power, practical military
limitations and international politics eventually produced the more limited aim of regaining
control of the Suez Canal.
188

The Suez expedition was to be a combined joint operation from the onset. General Sir
Charles Keightley was appointed Commander-in-Chief of allied forces with Vice-Admiral
DEscadre Barjot as his deputy. In the higher tiers of command of the operation, French
senior officers were placed as deputies to British commanders throughout what was
essentially a British command structure. Formations and units from both armed forces
remained under national control and reported to the higher level combined headquarters. As
General Andr Beaufre, the deputy Land Task Force Commander stated: in deciding at the
outset of planning to subordinate the French command to the British within an integrated
command system, we were accepting the most thoroughgoing solution.
189
According to
Keightley, the allied command structure worked extraordinarily well in military terms, with

187
For Background to the crisis see, Roy Fullick and Geoffrey Powell, Suez: The Double War,
London, 1979, pp. 1-15; Robert Jackson, Suez 1956: Operation Musketeer, Barnsley: Leo Cooper,
2006, pp. 7-13; and, W. M. Roger Louis and Roger Owen (eds.), Suez 1956: The Crisis and Its
Consequences, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989.
188
Fullick and Powell, Suez: The Double War, pp. 54-66.
189
Andr Beaufre, The Suez Expedition 1956, London: Faber and Faber, 1969, p. 132.
106

the biggest problem being that the British and French Governments were giving divergent
directions to their Commanders.
190
From a military perspective, the fact that it was not a
joint headquarters created disconnects between each of the British services which impacted
on co-ordination of the operation. Keightleys post-operations report recommended the
establishment of a standing joint headquarters to undertake such operations in the future.
191

Keightley also highlighted that the successful working of the coalition command structure
depended on personalities.
192

Given the lack of clarity over political aims, in the run-up to the operation in August
and September plans went through a number of revisions. Initial planning envisaged seizing a
foothold in Egypt at Alexandria, a build-up of land forces followed by an advance on Cairo
which then proceeded to the Suez Canal. This ambitious scheme eventually gave way to a
more focused airborne and amphibious assault at the northern end of the Suez Canal and a
drive south to secure the length of it. Musketeer Revise as it became known, because of the
short time available to the allied planners, was a modification of an earlier plan and, after
further political prevarication, was eventually given the go-ahead to be initiated in late
October.
The Musketeer Revise plan had assigned to it very sizable forces, with Britain
providing 45,000 men, 12,000 vehicles, 300 aircraft and 100 warships. The French side
contributed to the operation 34,000 men, 9,000 vehicles, 200 aircraft and 30 warships. For the
seizure of Port Said and Port Fuad, airborne forces committed included elements of the
British 16
th
Independent Parachute Brigade Group and the French 10
th
Airborne Division.
The amphibious part of the operation included 3 Commando Brigade Royal Marines and
elements from the French airborne division. Follow-on forces assigned to the operation

190
TNA [The National archives, UK], DEFE 7/1081, Egypt Keightley Report, 1956.
191
Ibid.
192
Ibid.
107

included the British 3 Infantry Division deploying from the UK and the French 7 Division
Mecanique Rapide moving into theatre from Algeria.
193

Mounting the operation entailed considerable challenges. The initial assault forces
launched the operation out of bases in Malta and Cyprus. The transit times necessitated by the
distances into theatre left little scope for surprise in terms of the initial landings. The
amphibious assault forces had to sail nearly 1,000 miles from Malta to Port Said, taking six
days. The poor port facilities at Cyprus meant that it could not be used to stage the
amphibious assault despite being only 250 miles from the objective. The assault amphibious
shipping was old and slow, having seen service in the Second World War. The capacity of the
amphibious shipping also meant that little more than a brigade of forces could be delivered in
the seaborne assault.
194
The airborne part of the operation faced other challenges certainly
on the British side. The airborne forces committed to jump were engaged in
counterinsurgency operations on Cyprus until a few weeks before Musketeer Revise began.
Training time and opportunities were limited, with 3 Para having had only one battalion drop
on exercise the previous summer. The individual equipment of 3 Para was virtually
unchanged since 1944. The French position in terms of capabilities was better as the French
Army required fundamental re-equipment following the Second World War. In particular,
their transport aircraft were more modern and suited to the airborne delivery role.
195

Musketeer Revise envisaged dropping 3 Para to the west of Port Said to seize the
Gamil airfield. French airborne forces had the mission of seizing key bridges and installations
inland and south of Port Said and Port Fuad. The amphibious assault would be directed into

193
Jackson, Suez 1956: Operation Musketeer, p. 19.
194
Ian Speller, The Suez Crisis: Operation MUSKETEER, November 1956, in: T. Lovering , ed.,
Amphibious Assault Manoeuvre from the Sea: Amphibious Operations from the Last Century,
Seafarer Books, 2007, p. 400.

195
Ibid., pp. 66-68.
108

the heart of the port and urban area at the head of the Suez Canal. Indeed, both the airborne
and amphibious forces were mounting an assault into a highly built-up area. An innovation in
the operation included helicopter insertion of Royal Marine Commandos from HMS Ocean
and HMS Theseus. These two Royal Navy carriers had been modified into helicopter landing
platforms in what was to be the first major use of helicopters in a British amphibious
operation.
196

Egyptian conventional capabilities were not seen as formidable despite the influx of
modern Soviet weaponry. In any case, much of the Egyptian Army was committed to dealing
with the Israeli attack into the Sinai. Not so apparent were Egyptian preparations for
insurgent action once Anglo-French forces were in occupation of Egyptian territory. For
political reasons and in order to reduce the risk of casualties among Egyptian non-combatants
there were significant constraints on the employment of force. For example, naval gunfire
support for the initial assault was very limited in duration and scale to avoid civilian
casualties in a densely-populated urban area.
197

Air operations conducted by the RAF and the French air force relied on Cypriot
airfields. The facilities were too few and cramped for the large numbers of fighters, and strike
and transport aircraft that had to be accommodated. Nevertheless, air operations successfully
neutralized Egyptian air capabilities and insured air supremacy over the invasion area.
Because the distance from Cyprus to Egypt allowed little loiter time for aircraft of the day,
the naval aviation assets embarked on the five British and French aircraft carriers provided
persistent close air support for the assault forces.
198

196
Despatch by Sir Charles F. Keightley, Commander-in-Chief, Allied Forces, Operations in Egypt
November to December 1956, Supplement to the London Gazette, 10 September 1957, pp. 5327-5337.
197
Ibid, p. 5333.
198
For an overview of air operations see, Brian Cull, Wings Over Suez, London: Grub Street, 1996.
109

Operation Musketeer began on 31 October 1956 with the launching of air strikes
against the Egyptian air force which possessed a mixture of reasonably modern combat
aircraft of British and Soviet origin. By 2 November the Egyptian air force was neutralised
with targets shifting from airfields to other military facilities. Successful air operations set the
scene for the airborne assault on 5 November which took its assigned objectives followed by
the amphibious assault a day later. By late 7 November Port Said was virtually cleared of
enemy forces after time-consuming house clearance by allied units on the ground. Moreover,
Allied units began to drive south in an effort to secure the length of the Suez Canal. The
military operations, however, were to grind to a halt due to international pressure. The United
States, whose support for the operation had not been secured by the British government, used
its financial leverage on the British economy to force an end to the Suez expedition. With a
ceasefire arranged by 8 November, one of the earliest UN peacekeeping missions was
established to separate Egyptian and allied forces. British and French soldiers, however,
faced a smouldering urban insurgency in Port Said until their withdrawal in December 1956.
In assessing the military performance of the Suez expedition, the coalition aspects of
the operation were less problematic and generally worked well. As was the case in so many
coalition operations it was down to the commanders who made it work. The expeditionary
elements of Suez, however, indicated important operational and capability deficiencies,
particularly in British forces. One of the most serious operational shortcomings was the time
that it took to organise and launch the operation. In part this was due to political factors, but
the lack of suitable amphibious shipping and inadequate basing facilities from which to stage
the operation led to the rather stately tempo. The British armed forces lacked modern
equipment (much dating from the Second World War) in such capabilities as amphibious
shipping and transport aircraft. These shortcomings affected the capacity of assault forces to
generate a higher tempo operation. Some important innovations did take place in the use of
110

the helicopter in ship-to-shore delivery of assault forces, a capability which heralded the birth
of the Commando carrier (Landing Platform Helicopter LPH in modern naval terminology)
in British service.

Operation Corporate
Repossession of the Falklands, April-June 1982

When Argentine forces descended on the Falkland Islands on 2 April 1982, Britain
faced a daunting challenge: repossessing a territory geographically extremely remote from
the United Kingdom at a time when most of her resources were not immediately deployable
owing first to the countrys NATO commitment to the defence of Western Europe and the
North Atlantic, and second to her on-going struggle against the nationalist insurgency in
Northern Ireland. Margaret Thatchers government laboured under the further disadvantage
that the Argentine invasion caught it completely by surprise and lacking any contingency
plan for repossessing the islands, which lay 8,000 miles away in the South Atlantic. Nor
could the armed forces call upon any recent operational experience, for one had to look back
to the failed Suez Crisis of 1956 for the most recent example of a major expeditionary
operation launched from British shores. In the event, the forces assembled to liberate the
Falklands represented the UKs largest military and naval endeavour since the Second World
War.
This response the Argentines certainly did not anticipate, and indeed confidently
launched their invasion on the basis of various signals from London of waning interest in the
South Atlantic above all, in light of the withdrawal of the Royal Navys last patrol vessel,
HMS Endurance and on the mistaken assumption that Britain would not resort to force
once occupation became a fait accompli. Britain had moreover yet to carry out its extensive,
111

planned defence cuts stipulated by the Nott Review of the previous year. Yet if Britain found
herself caught unprepared, poor planning characterised the Argentine position from the very
start, for by invading in early April the Argentines inadvertently furnished their opponents
with a very narrow yet in the event a sufficiently large window of opportunity in which to
retake the islands before the southern hemisphere winter reached its height. Such
miscalculations above all the failure of Argentinas military junta accurately to gauge
Thatchers, not to mention the British publics, exasperation and resolve obliged Buenos
Aires to mount a poorly-devised defence of a bleak and inhospitable possession 400 miles off
its southern coast, leaving many of its best troops behind to protect its long border with Chile,
with whom, like Britain, Argentina also maintained a long-running territorial dispute.
The speed with which Britain launched the first elements of the Task Force mark out
its efforts at mounting an expeditionary operation on this scale as both remarkable and
impressive, particularly in light of the absence of any plans for operations in such a remote
part of the globe. In very short order the Royal Navy deployed two aircraft carriers, Hermes
and Invincible, which sailed from Portsmouth on 5 April, only three days after the Argentine
landings, while further departures swiftly followed with the requisitioned P & O liner,
Canberra conveying 40 and 45 Commando Royal Marines and 3 Para, accounting for much
of 3 Commando Brigade. By the middle of April many of the warships and supply vessels of
the Task Force had reached Ascension Island, 4,000 miles to the south though still only half
way to the Falklands. Wideawake Airfield would prove itself an absolutely essential element
in the success of the campaign, providing a secure base of operations which would assist
decisively in maintaining an exceptionally long logistics and command chain.
In fact, while the logistics chain remained vulnerable yet intact throughout the war, its
command counterpart proved one of the weaker elements of the operation as a whole, for the
campaign involved no overall theatre commander in situ. Owing to the essential maritime
112

nature of the operation the Royal Navy took precedence, with the Task Force Commander
drawn from that arm in the person of the Commander-in-Chief Fleet, based at Norwood,
Admiral Sir John Fieldhouse, who reported to Admiral Lewis, Chief of the Defence Staff.
Beneath them served the land forces commander, Major General Jeremy Moore, plus several
operational commanders, including Rear Admiral Sandy Woodward, responsible for all
vessels apart from the submarines, which reported directly to Northwood; Commodore
Michael Clapp, who led the amphibious ships; and Brigadier Julian Thompson, commanding
the Landing Task Group which consisted principally of 3 Commando Brigade, the first of the
two major ground formations dispatched to the South Atlantic.
British strategists well understood that success in so distant an area of operations
hinged upon an efficiently-managed logistics chain. Indeed, nothing less than a gargantuan
effort undertaken by the Royal Navy and the Royal Air Force could transport troops and
supplies such a prodigious distance, thus sustaining the fighting capabilities of British forces
so remote from home shores. To facilitate supply, large numbers of Hercules C-130s, VC
10s, strategic freighters and Boeing 707s would be required to convey tens of thousands of
tons of freight and thousands of personnel, supported by heavy-lift helicopters to cross-deck
supplies and move troops once in theatre. At sea, the Royal Fleet Auxiliary and dozens of
ships taken up from trade (STUFT) transported vital supplies of oil and vast amounts of other
supplies in cargo vessels, while the Ministry of Defence requisitioned many other types of
vessels, including the previously-mentioned Canberra, the North Sea ferry Norland, which
transported the whole of 2 Para, and the luxury liner Queen Elizabeth II, which carried most
of 5 Infantry Brigade.
This array of vessels, numbering over 80, supported the largest force of warships
deployed by Britain on active operations since 1945, including two aircraft carriers (carrying
between them 20 Sea Harriers), five destroyers, 11 frigates and three nuclear submarines. The
113

critical importance of this naval force not least its logistic element cannot be over-
estimated. The Argentines need only have disrupted it by sinking a few key vessels either
high-profile warships such as a carrier or a heavily-laden troopship, or several cargo vessels
holding essential equipment like helicopters, spare parts for aircraft, or oil before putting
the entire operation in jeopardy. Even without doing so, if the Argentines could simply
maintain a lengthy occupation of the capital, Port Stanley, deteriorating weather conditions
would bring their opponents logistic system to a halt and oblige the Task Force to withdraw
at least as far as Ascension thus rendering the renewal of operations after winter a very
remote possibility for with the initiative lost and the mood of public opinion almost
certainly dampened by the failure of British forces to achieve a quick, decisive victory at
minimal cost in lives, there could remain no appetite for renewed hostilities by the time the
skies finally cleared and the seas calmed. In short, an expeditionary operation conducted at
such great distance from home waters faced the very pressing constraint of time, for with
winter approaching operations intended to secure repossession of the Falklands could not
extend much beyond mid-June before snow, high winds, poor visibility and heavy seas
rendered impossible operational sorties conducted by fighter aircraft as well as heliborne
resupply and troop transport.
The objective of the task force was to establish an air and sea blockade of the islands
in order to prepare the way for an amphibious landing, first by 3 Commando Brigade and
later by 5 Infantry Brigade, with the expeditions ultimate goal the capture of Port Stanley,
the site of the great majority of the islands 1,800 inhabitants and the site of the principal
airfield and port. The Argentines garrisoned the islands with 13,000 troops, artillery and anti-
aircraft guns, against which Britain could deploy 7,000 ground troops and supporting naval
and air elements. Yet if the British could not match the Argentines numerically, they
benefitted enormously from the fact that the airstrips on the Falklands were not substantial
114

enough to enable the Argentines to employ their best aircraft, thus obliging them to launch
their Skyhawks, Super Etendards, Mirages and Daggers from bases on the South American
mainland about 400 miles west of Stanley. This marked the practical limit of their range,
which left pilots only a few minutes of flight time over the Falklands a serious disadvantage
for aircraft which, like the Skyhawk and Mirage, closely matched the capabilities of the
British Harrier. In addition to fighters, the Argentines operated a number of Pucara ground
attack aircraft which could operate throughout the islands, supplemented by helicopters of
which, like their opponents, they possessed in insufficient numbers.
From the British point of view recapturing the islands would require a strategy based
on stages: first, imposing a sea blockade around the Falklands; retaking South Georgia
(which lies 800 miles to the southeast) to make use of it as a secure base and transit area;
second, establishing air and naval supremacy around the Falklands; and finally, defeating the
Argentine garrison on the Falklands and reoccupying the islands. Strategists intensively
studied the characteristics of the islands to determine the best site for a landing, a task made
considerably easier by the expert, first-hand knowledge of the coastline provided by Major
Ewan Southby-Tailyour RM, who had sailed around and mapped the islands periphery a few
years earlier. Although the Falklands cover about 4,000 square miles, once the landings
occurred ground forces would focus their attention on the Argentines in and around Stanley,
at the eastern end of East Falkland.
British strategists appreciated that they could largely ignore West Falkland, for
although the Argentines deployed about 1,700 on that island, the garrison there possessed no
amphibious capability to facilitate a crossing of Falkland Sound, the narrow body of water
which separated it from its far more strategically-important counterpart to the east. Moreover,
no jet aircraft could operate from this very sparsely inhabited area owing to the absence of a
suitable airfield and ground facilities. In short, Argentine forces on West Falkland stood
113

isolated and static, unable to affect operations to the east. On East Falkland, conversely, about
1,200 Argentines occupied the twin settlements of Darwin and Goose Green, towards the
western end of the island, while the bulk of their remaining forces garrisoned Stanley, and the
mountains immediately west of the town, where infantry and marines had established
prepared positions amongst the rocky crags of Mt Harriet, Two Sisters, Mt Tumbledown, Mt
Longdon and Wireless Ridge, the last of these less than two miles from the capital and the
last line of the Argentine defensive ring. The island boasted very few roads, a few isolated
settlements involved in sheep-farming, and large stretches of open, wind-swept, treeless,
water-logged ground made all the more difficult to traverse by the ubiquitous presence of
substantial tufts of grass known as babies heads the bane of the soldiers knees and
ankles.
The first phase of operations took place on 25 April when a small force of Royal
Marines landed on South Georgia and forced the surrender of the token Argentine garrison
there. Shortly thereafter, in order to tighten the ring around the Falklands themselves, the
British government declared a total exclusion zone of 200 nautical miles around the islands, a
course intended to alert the Argentine navy that all vessels operating within this area now fell
subject to attack though it should be stressed that Britain retained her right to fire on vessels
operating outside these designated limits.
The first strike against the Argentines on the Falklands themselves came on 1 May
when an RAF Vulcan bomber, flown in historys longest sortie (from Britain to Ascension
and thence to East Falkland all made possible by regular inflight re-fuelling), targeted
Stanley airfield with 1,000 pound bombs. Due to incorrect mapping, however, the Vulcan
inflicted relatively little damage. Further attacks by carrier-borne aircraft caused more
substantial harm, particularly on Argentine aircraft both at Stanley and at Goose Green. The
following day, the Task Force struck a mortal blow on the naval front when the nuclear-
116

powered submarine HMS Conqueror sank the cruiser General Belgrano, taking 368 lives,
and constituting a loss of sufficient magnitude to persuade the Argentines to recall their entire
fleet, including their single aircraft carrier, to home waters. Yet if their naval assets were no
longer to play a role in the conflict, this certainly did not apply to the impressive air power
the Argentines could bring to bear from the mainland. Three days after the sinking of the
Belgrano an Exocet missile fired from a Super Etendard launched from Tierra del Fuego
struck HMS Sheffield, setting the ship ablaze, killing 20 sailors, injuring 24, and leaving the
stricken vessel a useless hulk.
Nevertheless, the Argentines failed to achieve air supremacy over the islands, as a
consequence of which amphibious commanders adhered to their schedule for landings on 21
May in San Carlos Water, an inlet on the west coast of East Falkland. Chosen from amongst
many potential landing sites, the beaches there proved suitable for landing craft, the
surrounding hills offered good cover from air attack and the narrow passages provided a
sheltered anchorage for supply vessels. The Argentines maintained only a small observing
force in the area which Special Forces could easily drive off. The only disadvantage lay in its
distance from Stanley: almost 60 miles of entirely exposed, boggy ground over which
helicopters could theoretically convey large amounts of supplies and equipment and a
substantial body of troops but only if three conditions were satisfied. First, a successful
offensive required the availability of sufficient numbers of helicopters and fuel; second, the
inability of the Argentines to mount an effective counterattack against San Carlos or any
main forward supply base which the British might establish closer to Stanley; and third, the
availability of sufficient air assets to keep the Argentines Pucaras or fighter aircraft at bay
while helicopters flew the many dozens of sorties required to convey ground forces and
artillery forward not to mention keeping them supplied with rations, water and ammunition
thereafter.
117

The landings proceeded unopposed in the early hours of 21 May, but even as the
Marines and Paras established a firm presence on the ground, over the course of the next four
days a series of determined air attacks struck British warships in Falkland Sound, now
dubbed Bomb Alley. Over 10 warships fell victim to Argentine bombs and Exocets,
including the frigate Ardent and the destroyer Coventry, which sank, and the frigate Antelope,
which blew up. Fortunately for the British, many Argentine bombs failed to explode and 10
Argentine aircraft were shot down, mostly by Sea Harriers. Although the Argentines had
inflicted serious damage on their opponents shipping, they failed to concentrate on the Task
Forces most vulnerable elements: the supply ships, the heavy loss of which, as noted earlier,
might have put paid to the entire British effort in a matter of days. Indeed, one loss struck the
Task Force particularly hard: that of the container ship Atlantic Conveyor, the loss of which
during an Exocet attack on 25 May included 10 helicopters and vital supplies, thus posing a
very serious blow to the Task Force in terms of its ability to move and resupply its ground
forces. Still, just enough helicopters remained at the disposal of Brigadier Thompson to
enable him to formulate plans for conveying a portion of his troops eastwards; the remaining
Marines and Paras he ordered to yomp and tab, respectively.
At the same time, on 28 May, 2 Para attacked the Argentine garrison at Darwin-Goose
Green where the Lt Col H Joness battalion, despite lacking proper fire support, overran a
composite force enjoying a clear numerical superiority and a trench-lined front stretching
across a narrow, easily-defensible isthmus. The British captured the entire garrison over a
thousand troops for a loss of 18 dead, including the CO, and 66 wounded. Meanwhile, as 40
Cdo remained behind to protect the supply base and medical facility at San Carlos,
helicopters conveyed 2 Para and 42 Cdo to a forward position at Mt Kent, 10 miles east of
Stanley, while 3 Para and 45 Cdo proceeded on foot bearing kit in excess of a hundred
pounds a remarkable feat which only troops enjoying the highest degree of fitness and
118

endurance could possibly hope to achieve. A few days later, on 1 June, 5 Infantry Brigade
landed at San Carlos, now making the entire ground force available to Maj Gen Jeremy
Moore RM, on whom devolved command of all ground forces, enabling Brig Thompson to
resume his normal role as commander of 3 Cdo Bde. All now seemed to bode well for the
British; but if poor intelligence and an inability to fly reliably in darkness denied the
Argentines the opportunity to slow the British advance, on 8 June they offered a graphic
reminder that the skies did not go uncontested everywhere, when over Fitzroy bombs dropped
by Skyhawks struck the landing ship Sir Galahad, carrying Welsh Guardsmen awaiting
orders to disembark, killing 48 men and injuring or burning another 115.
If the sinking of Sir Galahad (Sir Tristram had also been struck, but less severely) put
the Welsh Guards out of action, Moore nevertheless enjoyed a commanding position: 3 Cdo
Bde now stood poised within 10 miles of Stanley at the outer ring of Argentine defences,
with elements from 5 Inf Bde, including 2 Scots Guards and a battalion of Gurkhas deployed
to play an equal part in the assaults which now followed in short order, consisting of a series
of well-conducted, comprehensively-successful night attacks executed on 11-12 June against
Mt Harriet, Two Sisters and Mt Longdon conducted by 42 Cdo, 45 Cdo and 3 Para,
respectively, and, on the following evening, against Wireless Ridge and Mt Tumbledown, led
by 2 Para and 2 Scots Guards, respectively. In each case the survivors fled east into Stanley
where, on the morning of 14 June, the Argentine commander, Brigadier Mario Menendez,
surrendered all his forces on the Falklands. The entire ground phase of the campaign thus
concluded after a mere three weeks 21 May to 14 June a remarkable achievement
considering the fact that not only did the Argentines enjoy a clear numerical superiority over
the British, but possessed ample time with which to prepare their defences and establish
stockpiles of supplies during the nearly seven week period between their own invasion of 2
April and the British landings on 21 May.
119

Total losses for both sides in the conflict amounted to 252 British dead and 777
wounded across all services. The Task Force lost four warships and a landing craft, one fleet
auxiliary vessel and one merchantman. Helicopter losses amounted to 23 from the Royal
Navy, seven from the RAF, three from the Royal Marines and one from the Army. Argentine
fatalities amounted to about 750, plus 1,100 personnel wounded or ill. The entire garrison of
over 13,000 men fell into British hands, plus numerous armoured vehicles, aircraft and
artillery, rendering this one of the most successful expeditionary operations in British military
history.
In analysing the factors behind British success several stand out particularly
prominently: the assembly of the Task Force with extraordinary rapidity, including the
acquisition and fitting-out of requisitioned vessels to supplement the existing resources of
the Royal Navy and Royal Fleet Auxiliary within days of the Argentine invasion; the
formulation of a clearly laid-out and effective strategy for re-taking the islands; the dispatch
of naval and air assets all trained and equipped to a high standard in sufficient numbers to
drive off the Argentine navy as well as to confine air attacks down to an acceptable, albeit
expensive, level; the deployment of first-rate ground forces boasting superb levels of fitness,
training, motivation and junior officer and NCO leadership; the skilful use of Special Forces
(both SAS and SBS) for reconnaissance and raiding; and the acquisition, via diplomatic
channels, of clandestine, non-operational American logistic support in the form of vast
quantities of aviation fuel based at Ascension Island, as well as critical satellite intelligence.
No proper explanation of British victory must rest alone on the successes attributed to
the Task Force and planners in Northwood and Whitehall. Rather, a balanced approach must
consider some of the principal errors committed by the Argentines. Amongst many of their
shortcomings, they failed to concentrate their air attacks against the British logistic chain a
far more important element of the Task Force in terms of maintaining the operational
120

longevity of ground forces than high-profile naval assets; they neglected to concentrate their
efforts against the two opposing aircraft carriers, the loss of either of which might alone have
caused a set-back of sufficient magnitude as to jeopardise the entire British effort; they made
the short-sighted and fatal decision to deploy to the Falklands and South Georgia
predominately inexperienced recruits as opposed to marginally better-prepared reservists or,
above all, marines and Special Forces, both composed of full-time professional personnel;
they failed to recognise that light armour could operate across most of the islands despite the
boggy nature of the ground, giving them an incalculable advantage over the British, who
brought only small numbers of such vehicles; although incapable quite understandably of
protecting the entire coastline of East Falkland in anticipation of the British landing, they
failed once it materialised to mount a counterattack against the beachhead at San Carlos, thus
enabling 3 Cdo Bde to advance simultaneously south against Goose Green and east towards
enemy defences immediately west of Stanley; they maintained an inflexible, static defence
throughout the campaign, thus abandoning the initiative to the British from the moment they
effected their landing on 21 May; they operated an appallingly poor logistic system within
Stanley, such that while the garrison there received adequate provisions and rest, their
comrades only a few miles away in the mountains suffered from food shortages owing to
faulty administration, pilfering by their own commissariat, and an almost total absence of
supply vehicles capable of negotiating trackless ground; they failed to hold out in the defence
of Stanley even after the collapse of their defensive ring just west of the town, neglecting the
supreme advantage still remaining to them: deteriorating weather conditions, for with the
steady decline in visibility and temperature no British forces whether on land, at sea and in
the air could not sustain themselves, much less fight, for long after mid-June.

Suggested Reading
121

Anderson, Duncan. The Falklands War 1982. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2002.
Brown, David. The Royal Navy and the Falklands War. Barnsley: Pen and Sword, 1987.
Burden, Rodney, et al. Falklands: The Air War. Poole: Arms and Armour Press, 1986.
Clapp, Michael and Southby-Tailyour, Ewen. Amphibious Assault Falklands. Barnsley: Leo
Cooper, 1996.
Freedman, Sir Lawrence. The Official History of the Falklands Campaign. Abingdon:
Routledge, 2005.
Fremont-Barnes, Gregory. The Falklands 1982: Ground Operations in the South Atlantic.
Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2012.
Hastings, Max and Jenkins, Simon. Battle for the Falklands. London: Pan, 2010.
Middlebrook, Martin. The Falklands War 1982. London: Penguin Classics, 2007.
Thompson, Julian. No Picnic: 3 Commando Brigade in the South Atlantic 1982. Barnsley:
Leo Cooper, 1985.
Van der Bijl, Nick. Nine Battles to Stanley. Barnsley: Leo Cooper, 1999.
_______________. Victory in the Falklands. Barnsley: Pen & Sword Military, 2007.
Woodward, Sandy. One Hundred Days: The Memoirs of the Falklands Battle Group
Commander. London: HarperPress, 2000

Operation Palliser
British intervention in Sierra Leone, 2000
199

In April-May 2000 the United Nations peacekeeping mission in Sierra Leone reached
the edge of collapse when factions of the rebel Revolutionary United Front (RUF) broke the
Lom Peace Agreement. The British Labour Government's initial attempts to avoid direct
military intervention were overturned when further deterioration of the situation raised fears
for the safety of 1,000 British nationals in Sierra Leone. Additional pressure from the

199
Unless otherwise stated all information in this chapter is from A. Dorman, Blair's Successful War:
British Intervention in Sierra Leone, Farnham: Ashgate, 2009, chapter 4. Dorman's information is
drawn from private interviews with officers involved in Palliser.
122

international community for Britain to act in what was a former Crown Colony, long-standing
Foreign and Commonwealth Office (FCO) and Department for International Development
(DfiD) involvement in achieving a settlement in Sierra Leone, and the Labour Government's
strong internationalist ideology, exerted strong moral influences on the decision to militarily
intervene.
The initiation of an expeditionary operation requires the conduct of an operational
estimate in which 'the construct of a military force, its desired order and means of arrival in
theatre should be driven by careful analysis of the specific situation.
200
Moreover, doctrine
emphasized that the expeditionary operation should be set within a context of clear political
direction [and that] this analysis should be informed through estimates at both the military,
strategic and operational levels'.
201
In conducting Operation Palliser British commanders at
points experienced difficulties in meeting doctrinal requirements for a clear political aim,
sufficient preparation time, and adequate information as a basis for planning at the strategic
and operational levels.
Strategically, clarity of mission was hindered for a time by inter-departmental
differences. The Ministry of Defence's view of the deployment as one of rapid evacuation
followed by immediate withdrawal was at odds with the FCO's view that envisaged British
forces remaining to support stabilisation efforts and conflict resolution. The FCO position
was later accepted as British policy, but during the initial stages of Operation Palliser these
political arguments delayed issue of the formal mission directive until the second day of the
deployment on 9 May. In the interim between deployment and receipt of his directive Joint
Task Force Commander (JTFC), Brigadier David Richards, based his action upon verbal
orders given unilaterally by the Chief of the Defence Staff (CDS), General Sir Charles

200
Joint Doctrine Publication 3-00 (JDP 3-00) Campaign Execution, 3
rd
Edition, The Development,
Concepts and Doctrine Centre, Ministry of Defence, United Kingdom, October 2009, p. 1-1, p. 2-22.
201
Ibid.
123

Guthrie. As JDP 3-00 Campaign Execution observes, 'military planning and preparations may
have to be made with ambiguous strategic direction.'
202

Operationally, Permanent Joint Headquarters (PJHQ) was hampered in drawing up
military options by lack of up-to-date intelligence. To improve this situation the Operational
Reconnaissance and Liaison Team (ORLT) commanded by Brigadier David Richards
deployed, whilst PJHQ drew up three contingency deployment options. Option one envisaged
deployment of RAF transport aircraft protected by Special Forces to Lungi Airport (near the
capital, Freetown) to commence evacuation at 24 hours notice. Option two, requiring several
days to execute, involved 1st Battalion The Parachute Regiment (1 PARA) in the role of the
Airborne Task Force (ABTF). Option three involved the most powerful force based upon the
Amphibious Ready Group (ARG) of 42 Royal Marines Commando and supporting arms, but
required 10 days to arrive. To assist in these decisions the Paras and Marines each sent a
liaison officer to PJHQ to act with orders to get their units involved or not return.
Arrival of the ORLT on 6 May revealed the seriousness of the situation on the ground
and confusion in the UN Command. Richards requested the Joint Rapid Reaction Force
(JRRF), comprised of elements of 1 PARA and Special Forces, be moved to the French
airbase at Dakar in Senegal in order to speed any deployment. As the likelihood of
intervention emerged the MOD began a scramble to find the requisite medical supplies for a
tropical deployment, although shortages and lack of time meant that some personnel did not
receive them until in theatre.
On 7 May the ORLT was re-tasked as the Joint Task Force Headquarters (JTFHQ),
receiving reinforcements from officers on exercise in Ghana and the UK. To speed action
London devolved full political and military decision-making powers to the British High

202
Ibid.
124

Commissioner and Brigadier Richards. C Company 1 PARA with Special Forces flew in to
secure Lungi Airport from Dakar. Landing in a single RAF C-130 Hercules to their relief
they were met by a Liaison Officer from JTFHQ and elements of a Nigerian battalion from
UN forces rather than the feared possible 'warm' reception from the RUF. That day the ARG
sailed from Marseilles picking up extra personnel flown into Gibraltar. A Royal Navy Task
Group containing the aircraft carrier HMS Illustrious, carrying the RAF/RN Joint Harrier
Force, and the Joint Force Air Component Command (JFACC) vital for conducting offensive
air operations, was ordered to re-deploy from exercise in the North Atlantic. Similarly, D
Company, 2 PARA, was attached to 1 PARA whose A Company was in Jamaica. To assist in
the deployment and evacuation, the RAF deployed eight C-130 Hercules and four Tristar
passenger aircraft, with an additional five chartered civilian airliners. Lack of transport
aircraft capable of carrying the large Chinook transport helicopters required them to deploy
into theatre under their own power. Spanish refusal to allow use of its airspace over the
Canary Islands forced them to divert over the Portuguese Azores, necessitating a flight of
3,000 miles.
With Lungi airport secured the evacuation proceeded swiftly with the majority of
British nationals departing in a few days. During the operation tensions briefly erupted
between 1 PARA and DfiD when the latter failed to understand that the expansion of the
perimeter at Lungi was essential to keep RUF heavy weapons out of range of the runway and
evacuation points, and was not a military escalation. Inter-service problems also emerged.
The RAF refused to hold a squadron of Jaguar strike aircraft at the Azores, insisting they
continue to exercise in the United States, thereby removing any air support until HMS
Illustrious arrived on 14 May. Such criticism of the RAF ignores logistic demands that meant
the aircraft could not have been based at Lungi any earlier than the arrival of Illustrious.
Valid criticism can be made concerning initial RAF refusal to operate its Harrier contingent
123

aboard the carrier until procedures for pilot rescue were in place. In contrast RN Fleet Air
Arm Harriers commenced operations without insistence on such provisions.
What started out as a unilateral Non-Combatant Operation (NEO) to evacuate British
and other entitled citizens quickly expanded so that Palliser began to take on a distinctly
coalition hue. Even in the deployment phase, Palliser had already benefitted enormously
from French co-operation which had led to British forces being granted access to French
bases in Senegal, but the arrival of British forces led to the establishment of additional aims
by the British government. The new aims meant that British forces now took on the tasks of
assisting the government of Sierra Leone in the development of its armed forces and to
prevent the United Nations Mission in Sierra Leone (UNAMSIL) from collapsing.
203

Although British forces retained their operational independence, they quickly evolved into
the hub of a loose coalition to stabilise the failing state of Sierra Leone.

Operation TELIC I
The British invasion of Iraq, March-May 2003
204

In March 2003 Coalition forces under the overall command of United States Central
Command (CENTCOM) invaded Iraq in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The aim was the removal
of the Ba'ath Party regime under President Saddam Hussein and the destruction of alleged
stockpiles of chemical and biological weapons whose possession was seen as a threat to the
peace and stability of the Middle East. The invasion began on 19 March and was declared a
complete success by US President George Bush Jr in May. In reality what had ended in May

203
Brig D. J. Richards, Operation Palliser, Journal of the Royal Artillery, (October 2000), p. 13.
204
This section draws heavily upon unpublished restricted internal MOD reports and interviews by the
author whose full details cannot be disclosed. Quotes and observations drawn from these sources are
not cited.
126

was the war against Saddam that had begun with his invasion of Kuwait in 1990. What
followed was a new war over the future governance of Iraq that would see Coalition forces
operate in support of a fledgling Iraqi government against numerous ethnic, religious, tribal
and criminal insurgent groups and gangs. It would be the end of 2011 when the last American
combat forces, representing the final major Coalition war-fighting commitment, would be
able to withdraw from Iraq.
The British contribution to Iraqi Freedom was a tri-service deployment codenamed
Operation Telic I. The principal ground force was 1 (UK) Armoured Division comprising 7th
Armoured, 16 Air Assault, and 3 Commando Brigades. The British operated under the 1st US
Marine Expeditionary Force and were tasked with securing the right flank of the American
drive north towards Baghdad by securing Basra. Operations commenced on 19 March as 7th
and 16th Brigades moved towards Umm Qasr on the coast with 1st US Marine Division,
whilst 3 Commando Brigade conducted a series of air manoeuvre operations in to the Al Faw
peninsula to the south east of Basra. By 23 March the Royal Marines had taken over Umm
Qasr and secured Al Faw and 16 Air Assault held the Rumaila oilfields, thus securing the left
flank of 7th Armoured Brigade which was poised to secure Basra from bridgeheads over the
Shatt-Al-Basra waterway. From 1 April onwards 7th Armoured Brigade closed on Basra and
undertook a series of intelligence-led precision air strikes, ground raids and information
operations that crumbled enemy resistance and saw the city secured on 7 April, ending the
conventional war-fighting stage of Telic I.
In these operations the Royal Navy and RAF provided important support. The RN
provided escorts to the 78 transport ships bringing heavy equipment and supplies, undertook
mine counter-measures, provided amphibious lift, and at sea logistics support to its own and
other Coalition vessels. The RAF suppressed enemy SAM defences, interdicted enemy
127

forces, provided precision strikes with its latest air-launched cruise missiles and other
precision munitions in support of ground forces.
Operation Telic I had confronted the British armed forces with a number of challenges
in deploying and sustaining a balanced tri-service expeditionary force. In many ways the
operation was impressive in its achievements. The British committed 46,000 personnel,
15,000 vehicles, 360 RAF and civilian transport aircraft, 115 fixed wing aircraft, 100
helicopters, 78 cargo ships and over 30 RN vessels. This made Telic I larger than the
deployments to Korea in 1950, Suez in 1956 and comparable to Operation Granby in the
1990-1 Gulf War. Notably, whilst it had taken 22 weeks to deploy in 1990, in 2003 the same
was achieved in just 10 weeks.
205

Such figures obscure a number of fundamental problems the British encountered and
that demonstrate the problems of expeditionary operations undertaken at short notice, in haste
and at odds with formally established planning guidelines. The principal problem was the
limited time available for deployment. Although by summer 2002 the Foreign and
Commonwealth Office (FCO) had become convinced that war was inevitable this was not
formally communicated to the Ministry of Defence. In addition, the fear that undertaking
preparations for deployment might undermine a diplomatic solution already largely
discredited in political circles meant that British forces were not ordered to begin deployment
until mid-December. Consequently, it was 16 January - 61 days before the war began - when
forces commenced deployment.
206
The exception was 3 Commando Brigade which was
already poised at sea in the Arabian Gulf and began planning on 22 November 2002. This
situation was further compounded when irreconcilable diplomatic problems with Turkey
forced the British to abandon plans to operate 1 (UK) Armoured Division from there and re-

205
MOD (UK), Operation TELIC: United Kingdom Military Operations in Iraq, Report by
Comptroller and Auditor General (HC 60 Session, 2003-2004; 11 December 2003), p.1-3.
206
Ibid, p. 7.
128

deploy to Kuwait. The lack of time and extra logistic requirements meant that the original
intention to have a division of two heavy brigades was unfeasible, resulting in the lighter 16
Air Assault being brought in as a replacement of second choice. Set alongside the need to
start operations in March before the hot season in May, and clear American intent to go
without the British if they were not ready, meant that there was inadequate time to deploy,
resulting in equipment shortages in some areas and lack of time to work up forces and, in
particular, certain specialist troops.
The problems of international and alliance politics served to reveal the fallacy of
certain national defence planning assumptions made in the United Kingdom over preceding
years. Although the 1998 Strategic Defence and Security Review had committed to
developing British expeditionary capabilities to undertake operations such as Telic I, pressure
from the Nation Audit Office and Committee of Public Accounts to reduce costs led the
Ministry of Defence to reduce its stockpiles of stores. Critically, this was predicated on a
guarantee that there would always be a 90-day warning order for any deployment in order to
build up stores from Urgent Operational Requirements (UOR) placed on industry. In reality,
industry struggled to meet the many UORs in light of having only a 70-day warning period
which was further reduced by Christmas to about 49 days. The result was critical shortages in
some areas; for example, chemical and biological equipment and vehicle spares. Shortages in
spares were made up by cannibalising vehicles not employed; in the case of the Challenger 2
Main Battle Tank 22% of the total fleet was rendered unserviceable to meet 7th Armoured
Brigades needs.
207
Lack of equipment and training of personnel in storing medical supplies at
the correct temperature saw the RAMC throw away drugs and vaccines because they had no
confidence in their quality.

207
Ibid, p. 12.
129

Problems of overall availability of certain supplies were compounded by
organisational problems in their handling and shipping. This was the responsibility of the
Defence Transport Military Administration (part of the Defence Logistics Office) and in-
theatre service logistics authorities. Procedural problems in scheduling and tracking the
shipment of container supplies from Britain to Kuwait led a post-war official report to
comment: 'Means of tracking supplies in-theatre was largely ineffective, manpower intensive
and swamped by the sheer volume of supplies. The whereabouts of some key equipment and
supplies was unknown'.
208
In one instance the mis-prioritisation of supplies meant that
equipment vital for lorry movement of ammunition arrived on 17 March limiting the ability
to move supplies to the front-line, exacerbating a belief among troops that a shortage existed
in what was in reality an abundant supply of ammunition.
209
This lack of confidence in the
supply chain led to further disruption as forward units sent parties in search of their
containers with the result that there was considerable unauthorised taking of supplies destined
for other units, with obvious implications. In the most bizarre case, unable to locate stores in
containers already in theatre a team from 1 (UK) Armoured Division was dispatched to the
Defence Stores and Distribution Agency in Bicester, Oxfordshire
210
! The cumulative effect of
these problems was summarised by one senior officer who noted that if 1 (UK) Armoured
Division had been required to advance farther and fight at a more sustained and higher
intensity its logistic situation would have become a matter of serious concern.
Operation Telic I was a considerable achievement as a British expeditionary
operation. Considerable success was achieved both in the deployment and operation of
forces. That serious weaknesses in overall defence planning and in the organisation of
logistics was revealed was a sobering lesson one noted in an official report that summarised

208
Ibid, p. 4.
209
Ibid, p. 21
210
Ibid, p.19.
130

a fundamental problem of expeditionary operations that are often conducted at short notice.
In future, it observed, Britain 'Might not have the preparation time available to it that it had
previously presumed'.
211

Insurgency

Introduction

Definitions of what insurgency constitutes are legion, with most of the worlds major
armies and law-enforcement agencies having at least one, sometimes several. Though they
tend to differ in wording and stress certain features to a greater or lesser degree, their gist is
very similar. In the British case, the Army defines insurgency as an organised, violent
subversion used to effect or prevent political control, as a challenge to establish
authority.
212
It is usually taken as read that such a group, irrespective of it representing a
body of popular opinion which is in the majority or the minority does not have ready access
to the sources of power of a state such as its armed forces or police agencies. As a result of
this, the armed struggle rather than taking the form of a coup d etat will manifest itself as an
insurgent campaign featuring terrorist attacks, guerrilla warfare, or both. Historically, this is
nothing new, with the weak having recurred to this form of war as a way of getting back at
the strong, such as an occupying power, for a long time. Before the French Revolution such
movements, however, tended to be tribal in nature and accordingly limited in their scope.
Only in exceptionally rare cases did such a grassroots movement develop the momentum
needed to threaten the overthrow of a modern state or the defeat of a sizeable army.

Theories

211
Ibid, p.7.
212
Army Field Manual. Countering Insurgency. Volume 1 Part 10: January 2010 (Section 2)
131

The great Prussian theorist of war, Carl von Clausewitz devoted but a small chapter in his
1831 book On War to the subject of insurgent warfare. Without intending to belittle its
potential, he expressed the opinion that insurgents would only be able to persevere when
operating in conjunction with conventional forces. This is what had happened in Spain from
1808 to 1813. Spanish insurgents (guerrilleros), quite a few of whom drew their strength
from social circumstances which had favoured banditry prior to invasion, preyed on the
French and their supporters and forced the occupying power to spread itself thin by dotting
the country with small garrisons and patrolling the major roads. On the downside, they
usually only paid lip service to directives coming from the central Spanish government,
proved reluctant to cooperate with other bands and, more often than not, preyed on the local
civilian population to the same degree as on the French. Having said this, the fact that the
insurgents supplied the Allied armies with ready intelligence turned them into a major asset
from an operational point of view. Nothing suggests, however, that they would ever have
been in a position to drive the French from Iberia unassisted.
213

Nearly a hundred years after Clausewitz penned On War these thoughts were echoed by
T. E. Lawrence, a British officer detached to the western Arabian peninsula in 1916 to assist
an ongoing Arab rebellion against the Ottoman Empire (Germanys Middle Eastern ally).
Lawrence managed to convince the various tribes of rebellious Bedouin to cooperate with
each other and to desist from attacking towns, since this would do little more than provide the
Turks with an opportunity to engage them with superior firepower. Instead he advised
constant attacks on the railway which linked this backwater of the Turkish Empire with its
centres of power further north. In a similar vein to Clausewitz, Lawrence saw the insurgents
as playing a role subordinate to that of conventional forces. The last months of the war in the

213
For a recent analysis of this aspect of the Napoleonic wars, see Charles J. Esdaile, Fighting Napoleon:
Guerrillas, Bandits and Adventurers in Spain 1808-1814. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2004.
132

Middle East, which saw a rapid advance of Allied armies through what are today Israel and
Syria, with the newly formed insurgent armies operating on their right flank, appeared to
offer proof of the basic soundness of this thinking. Today Lawrences thoughts on those
events are above all remarkable for the emphasis he placed on the need to adapt an insurgent
strategy to the cultural and historical framework of the society affected by it.
214

1917 saw the birth of the worlds first Communist regime Soviet Russia. Even though
the exceptional circumstances prevailing in Russia that year allowed the Communist Party of
the Soviet Union under Vladimir Lenin to stage a coup rather than having to gain power from
the ground up, for the next 70-80 years Communist ideology would prove to be the main
ideological propellant for insurgencies all over the world.
215
Politically, it seemed to give
millions of oppressed people a viable solution to their woes as well as a plausible reason to
believe that the forces of history were on their side; i.e., that time was ripe for action. In
keeping with the legacy of the European urban uprisings of 1848 (revolutions in Paris, Berlin,
Vienna and elsewhere) and 1871 (the Paris Commune), orthodox communism showed a
certain tendency to see revolts by the urban proletariat as the preferred tool of revolution,
even though other courses of action were not ruled out.
In the 1930s, the Chinese Communist leader Mao Tse Tung put forward a blueprint for an
insurgent strategy which went well beyond anything Clausewitz and Lawrence and even
Lenin had envisaged. He was greatly assisted in this by the turmoil experienced at the time by
large parts of China. In the years which followed the fall of the Manchu dynasty in 1911 and
the proclamation of the republic, much of China fell prey to secessionist movements and
assorted warlords, with gangs of bandits making life unbearable in rural areas. When the
Kuomintang Party under Chiang Kai-shek had finally managed to establish effective

214
See for instance, wwi.lib.byu.edu/index.php/The_ 27_ Articles_ of_ T.E._ Lawrence
215
For a thorough account of the ideological permutations of Communism, see David Priestland, The Red Flag:
How Communism Changed the World. London: Grove Press 2010.
133

government control over a large part of the country in the late 1920s and turned to the task of
wiping out the Communists, the latter were unwittingly assisted by a Japanese invasion. In
the ensuing years, the main body of the Communists managed to establish a safe base area in
remote Yenan and nurse their wounds. The regular army, on the other hand, while attempting
to protect the remainder of the countrys demographic and industrial centres from the
invaders found itself on the receiving end of a whole series of offensive drives, which ended
up by inflicting crippling damage on it. It was this experience which gave Mao the
framework for his idea of protracted war. An initial defensive phase would see the
insurgents establish a safe base area and proselytise among the rural population, with the
politicisation of the latter being seen as the key to this new approach. Military action during
this period would be very limited. The stalemate phase would see increased guerrilla warfare
and the establishment of further safe base areas. At a tactical level, regular forces would only
be engaged if the tactical circumstances favoured the insurgents. By the time the offensive
phase was initiated, Mao asserted that a large part of the guerrilla force needed to have made
the transition to high-intensity warfare capability. These units would then seek out and defeat
the main government forces. While Clausewitz and Lawrence had just seen insurgent warfare
as a means to an end, with Mao, the military insurgency and the political revolution acting
practically as one aimed at the overthrow of the social structures of the affected society. At a
purely operational level, this meant that any territory occupied by insurgents for any length of
time would be infested with political cadres to facilitate the insurgents return in case of a
temporary retreat. Mao had shown remarkable flexibility in adapting the dictates of orthodox
Communism to the circumstances of 1930s China. Very much like Clausewitz, he had also
plundered the events of the recent past to find historical precedents which would buttress his
134

theories. Last, but not least, he had been prepared to admit that the struggle would likely as
not be long and bloody.
216

The last theory to be examined here constitutes an attempt to dodge this uncomfortable
truth. In 1956-58 the Caribbean island of Cuba was rocked by an insurgency which started
from very small beginnings but then snowballed into a movement that drew support from
Cubans from all walks of life while at the same time spreading despondency among the army
facing it. Effective use was made of gullible representatives of the western media who were
allowed to visit the insurgent HQ in the Sierra Maestra and produced sympathetic coverage.
In the insurgencys final phase, opposition melted away so rapidly that one historian has
likened those events less to an insurgency than to Mussolinis 1922 March on Rome.
217
One
of the insurgent leaders, Ernesto Che Guevara, convinced himself that, far from being a
fluke, these events constituted the shape of things to come in the underdeveloped societies of
Latin America. A small group of dedicated revolutionaries, he argued, would by their very
actions be able to create an insurgent foco (Spanish for focus) from which the rebellion
would spread across the entire country. Rather than wait for the right set of circumstances to
favour the revolution (something Communist ideology had always stressed), the insurgents
would be able to create them for themselves. Needless to say this disregarded the fact that
Latin American societies, though sharing an early history and even a common language, had
hardly evolved in parallel. Cuba in the 1950s had actually been more prosperous than the next
country Guevara tried to subvert Bolivia. Even so, the greater proficiency of the Bolivian
army, by now aided by the US, together with poor preparation of the human terrain, was

216
For a pithy introduction into Maos military thought, see Samuel B. Griffith II, ed., Mao-Tse-Tung on
Guerrilla Warfare. Baltimore: Maryland 1992.
217
Daniel Moran, Wars of National Liberation. London: Cassell & Co. 2001, p. 145.
133

more than enough to put paid to a rather hare-brained attempt on the part of Guevara and a
small band to start an insurgency there in 1967.
218

Limitations

The key limitation of any insurgent strategy lies in the unpredictability with which the
audience it is addressing might react to it. Different people have rebelled against those
wielding power for different reasons at different times. Any insurgency needs to allow for
this by closely studying the historical pressure points of a society. While one nation might
easily be rallied to drive out, for instance, a foreign occupier, another might have a long
history of simply resisting occupation by peaceful means. Most insurgencies are also civil
wars and the politics affecting such conflicts can play a major role in galvanising or limiting a
rebellion. If the insurgents hail mostly from a particular ethnic minority, this can have
unforeseen effects insofar as the other ethnic groups even when critical of those in power
are likely to rally behind the government almost by default. Only in a few cases is the case
for rebellion so powerful and all-pervading that ethnic groups lacking a history of making
common cause end up forming an anti-government front. The most clear-cut instance of such
an evolution is to be found in occupied Yugoslavia, most of which was divided between the
Germans and Italians during the Second World War. While the Axis occupiers made a few
concessions to a newly-founded Serb puppet state, they gave the Slovenes no such
perspective and installed ultra-fascist collaborators with a genocidal agenda (the Ustasha) in
the only genuinely independent state to emerge out of the carve-up of the old Yugoslavia: the
Independent State of Croatia, which combined Croatia and Bosnia-Herzegovina. As a result,
while Bosnian Serbs were disproportionately represented in the ranks of the Communist

218
For a critical appraisal of Guevaras thinking on insurgent warfare see Paul J. Dosal, Comandante Che:
Guerrilla soldier, commander and strategist, 1958-1967. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2003.
136

insurgents (the partisans), Croats, Muslims and Slovenes had joined them in large numbers
by 1943-44.
219
The case of Malaya in the 1950s is much more typical: there, none of the other
ethnic groups took to the idea of allowing the local Chinese to become their future lord and
masters, thus leaving the insurgents isolated.
Conversely, the government/occupying power can reinforce its war against the
insurgency or terminate it for the most unforeseen reasons. While a domestic government will
usually have few compunctions about escalating the struggle, a foreign occupier may
depending on other priorities escalate or terminate his commitment to the ongoing struggle
quite abruptly. After their spectacular defeat in Indochina (1946-54)
220
, the French might
have been expected to throw in the towel as far as the maintenance of their colonial empire
was concerned, especially since this was the course of action being adopted by virtually all
other European powers.
221
Instead in Algeria (1954-62) they made a maximum effort which
by 1959-60 put them on the threshold to victory
222
, only for a new government under
President Charles de Gaulle to then sign an agreement with the insurgents which gave the
fruits of that victory away virtually overnight. Lest the reader put this down to the fickle
nature of the Latin temperament, it is worth remembering that Britain put an end to the Irish
insurgency (1919-21) under very similar circumstances.
Militarily, any insurgent movement has to find a way to work around the fact that the
enemy is likely to enjoy a considerable to crushing margin of superiority in terms of access to
greater firepower and technology, with air power constituting the most obvious manifestation
of this. If successful, the progress of the insurgency may render it necessary to move on to the

219
Jozo Tomasevich, War and Revolution in Yugoslavia, 1941-1945: Occupation and Collaboration. Stanford,
CA: Stanford University Press, 2001.
220
Martin Windrow, The Last Valley: Dien Bien Phu and the French defeat in Vietnam. London: Weidenfeld &
Nicholson 2004; Mark Atwood Lawrence & Fredrik Logevall, eds., The First Vietnam War: Colonial conflict
and Cold War crisis. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2007.
221
The one major exception to this rule was Portugal.
222
For the French COIN campaign in Algeria see the relevant chapter below .
137

equivalent of the Maoist Third Phase: forming units capable of conventional high-intensity
warfare. Even if the equipment to do so is readily available, the decision is still a very risky
one, since it basically requires the insurgents to break cover on a large scale and expose
themselves to superior firepower. In the case of the Indochina War, the French colonial
power, even though severely weakened, in 1951 managed to inflict a series of major defeats
on the Vietminh insurgents when the latter attempted to rush the French position in the Red
River Delta around Hanoi and Haiphong. Almost as sobering as the prospect of defeat is the
likelihood of a Maoist second phase which stretches into eternity an unending stalemate.
The best case study is to be found in the Latin American republic of Colombia. There, the
Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias Colombianas (FARC) have waged guerrilla warfare
against virtually every government since 1962. Government in Colombia has a long history
of being weak and ineffective, especially in rural areas, and the FARC in its heyday have
ruled over a large swathe of the country; this state of affairs notwithstanding they have never
been able to seize a provincial city, much less the capital. In recent years, targeted strikes by
the Colombian armed forces have forced the FARC deeper and deeper into the jungle and
turned an already unlikely victory into a mirage. These days, FARC manages to fund its
existence by running extortion rackets and taking protection money from drug lords.

The urban option

Taking an insurgency into an urban area at first glance appears to be self-defeating: in the
first instance, guerrillas have always made a point of choosing areas rendered inaccessible by
forests, jungles or mountains in order to gain a degree of protection from the governments
superior firepower. In a city, the available transport network makes this a moot point.
Moreover, politically, taking over a major city constitutes a challenge which no occupying
power or government will be in a position to overlook or ignore. However, opportunity or
138

circumstances may force the insurgent leadership to opt for an all-out urban uprising of the
kind imagined by the Marxist theorists of the late 19
th
century. In the case of the Warsaw
uprising (1 August

- 2 October 1944) the proximity of the German frontline practically left
the insurgents with no other choice than to make an attempt to take the city there were no
other worthwhile objectives left and a Soviet move had to be pre-empted. Even though
partially successful, the ultimate outcome proved that against an adversary willing to make
the maximum use of superior firepower in a congested environment, while disregarding the
safety of local civilians, the idea of an urban insurgency was simply not viable. Hungarian
rebels facing the Red Army in Budapest (1956) and the Vietcong challenging the US Army
and the South Vietnamese in Saigon (1968) failed to find a solution to the same dilemma; in
the latter case the problem was compounded by the fact that most of the urban insurgents
were actually infiltrators from the countryside who on the day of the uprising struggled to
make their rendezvous points in time because of their lack of local knowledge. Both in the
case of Warsaw 1944 and Saigon 1968 the insurgents had had some reason to expect outside
help after a few days which then failed to materialise; in the case of Fallujah in 2004, not
even that far-fetched hope was likely, thus turning this battle into a case study for all the
problems likely to limit the impact of an urban uprising: though well-armed, the Sunni
insurgents were not very numerous (c. 3,000-4,000). They were given time enough to
establish themselves in the city, but then found themselves trapped from all sides. By the time
the US Marines and their allies moved in, the insurgents had decided to hold a number of
fortified buildings rather than most of the city, hoping to force a costly FIBUA battle on their
enemy. While Coalition forces had considerably more qualms about harming civilians than
the Germans had had in 1944, superior tactics and weaponry allowed the Coalition forces to
139

wrest control of Fallujah from the insurgents at a cost (95 fatalities) and within a time frame
(six weeks), which while well out of the ordinary, was still deemed acceptable.
223

The only form of urban insurgency which is likely to be with us for a long time yet is
that waged by a small band of men seeking spectaculars essentially, terrorism. Algiers
1957, Montevideo 1963-73 as well as Londonderry and Belfast 1969-98 have witnessed
urban insurgencies which rarely featured more than a couple of hundred activists at the
most. Tactics tend to be similar to those of the first Maoist phase insofar as the security forces
are engaged deliberately only on occasions. The big advantage of this approach is that it
facilitates the propaganda of the deed, since there are usually plenty of media
representatives on hand and even an authoritarian government will struggle to completely
suppress the news of this challenge to its authority spreading all over the world. On the
downside, a small band of activists is hardly in a position to gain adherents in appreciable
numbers for security reasons, thus limiting the impact they might conceivably have right
from the start. Almost uniquely, an exception to this rule can be made for EOKA, which
fought a mostly urban insurgency against the British colonial administration in the 1950s
while enjoying the passive support of the overwhelming majority of Greek Cypriots. The
1959 settlement saw both sides making important concessions, but it still constitutes the
nearest thing to a clear-cut success story for urban insurgency.
224
Even though the increased
urbanisation of the world we live in may well create more opportunities for campaigns fought
along these lines, at the moment it appears to be a strategic dead end. Urban areas are
however likely to play a role especially when poorly policed as safe base areas into which
rural insurgents can retreat for replenishment, R & R and medical aid.

223
For these and other case studies, see Anthony James Joes, Urban Guerrilla Warfare. University of Kentucky
Press, 2007.
224
Nick van der Bijl, The Cyprus Emergency: The Divided Island 1955-1974. Barnsley: Pen & Sword , 2010.
Despite its rather misleading title, most of the contents of this book are dedicated to the events of the 1950s
insurgency.
140

Conclusion

Very few insurgencies have triumphed without an appreciable degree of outside help
and those that did succeed (like Cuba) were nevertheless assisted in their progress by some
massive failure on the part of the government they were fighting or by their adversary being a
colonial empire with only a lukewarm commitment to staying the course. Some insurgent
leaders (Mao and Guevara come to mind) placed great stress on the supposedly
revolutionary nature of their strategies, but it is important to remember that the
circumstances as dictated by the culture and history of the countries they were trying to
subvert played at least as big a role in shaping their course of action as any ideological pre-
disposition on their part. This was a point which Lawrence understood very well, though
Guevara ultimately did not.
Early 20
th
century insurgencies

Insurgency in the first half of the 20th century continued to be linked with the threat of
organised revolution in the developed industrialised world, and armed opposition or revolt
against various colonial empires. There were, however, important differences from the 19th
century.
Most colonial empires had reached their peak, both in the strategic and economic value
of their colonies, and in the ideology of empire as a positive force. The British Empire
reached its largest extent in the 1920s, and in the same period there ceased to be anywhere on
earth land or sea that was not claimed as its sovereign territory by at least one country.
The gains made by Britain and France after the First World War were League of Nations
mandates or trusteeships rather than formal colonies. Military conquest also became
141

harder to achieve, in every sense. The attempts by Japan to establish an empire in Asia in the
1930s were viewed as a violation of the established order rather than as a legitimate activity.
As global communications improved, and industrialisation spread outside Europe, the
likelihood of insurgents receiving political, financial or military support from outside also
increased.
In both the First and Second World Wars, all sides encouraged revolution and revolt
against their enemies as a weapon of war. The Soviet Union, particularly in its first decade,
saw the promotion of worldwide revolution as an important part of its own ideology. Up to
the end of the Second World War, counterinsurgency was largely a continuation of the older
imperial policing role, while insurgency developed new doctrines and techniques, and
became a much more systematic and organised activity. Indeed, one of the problems that
European empires had with early 20th century insurgencies is that they appeared to be only
colonial revolts or even banditry, which they knew already how to defeat. Already after the
First World War Europe no longer dominated the rest of the world, and two extra-European
powers, the United States and the Soviet Union, did so after 1945. The two central global
issues for the remainder of the 20th century were the Cold War and decolonisation, and it was
in this context that almost all insurgencies took place. The United Nations in particular took
from its creation a strongly anti-colonial line.
The British made their first significant move towards decolonisation with the granting
of independence to British India in 1947,
225
followed more reluctantly by France and other
European powers. Counterinsurgency in this period was seen by the British and French in
particular as an aspect of the Retreat from Empire, with the object of leaving behind stable

225
India had never existed as a unified state before the 20th century. British-controlled India was divided broadly
along religious lines into India and Pakistan; the latter physically split into two areas: East Pakistan and West
Pakistan. In 1971 the Second India-Pakistan War resulted in East Pakistan becoming the independent country of
Bangladesh. Difficulties arising from the frontier settlement of 1947 continue to persist.
142

independent countries that maintained close links with the original colonial power.
Revolutionary insurgents on the other hand viewed decolonisation as a sham in which
imperial powers gave up direct rule including responsibility for their colonies while
maintaining economic and financial domination. Economic issues became much more
important in revolutionary ideology, with land for the landless being a frequently used
slogan. The most influential theoretical exponent of these revolutionary ideas was the
Martinique-born Franz Fanon (1925-61), particularly in The Wretched of the Earth (1961,
which argued that violence was itself a form of liberation, and that colonial peoples had a
moral right to the wealth of the West.
The United States saw counterinsurgency as part of its broader strategy of
containment of the Soviet Union, as well as a continuation of its more traditional policies of
domination of Central and South America. While maintaining its own hold over Eastern
Europe, the Soviet Union particularly under Nikita Khrushchev (1894-1971, in power 1958-
64) proclaimed its support of revolutionary insurgents world-wide. As relations between the
United States and the Soviet Union improved in the later 1960s, ideological leadership of the
global revolution passed to Mao Tse-tungs China.
Meanwhile, in North America and Western Europe complex social and economic
changes promoted a culture of rebellion and even radical chic that challenged and partly
transformed the existing order. This reached its high point in 1968 with the American
recognition that the Vietnam War could not be won, and a near revolution (les eventements)
in Paris. Virtually all of this protest was entirely legitimate. Many revolutionary insurgents
of this period were, or recently had been, university students, regarded by theorist Abraham
Gullen (1913-94) of the Urugyan Tupermaros (themselves a distinctly intellectual terrorist
group with a populist slogan Everybody dances or nobody dances) as forming the
143

vanguard of the revolution.
226
In this context, almost any revolt or violent protest was
interpreted or at least portrayed as a Communist insurgency by its opponents. Repressive
regimes particularly in South and Central America and the Far East sought American support
under the broad provisions of the Truman Doctrine by depicting their adversaries as
consisting only of Soviet- or Chinese-backed Communist revolutionaries, sometimes quite
accurately. Both superpowers also engaged in covert action around the world, and many
countries used proxy war against their neighbours by supporting insurgents. Whereas 19th
century revolutionaries had seen popular attitudes within their own target countries as the
sole factor in success, 20th century insurgencies were recognised as having an international
dimension. When insurgencies took place in a colonial or post-colonial context, this included
the domestic political attitudes of the colonial power.
For Britain, most of the features associated with 20th century insurgency were already
present at its very start in the Boer War (1899-1902). This was virtually the last of the British
wars of colonial expansion, fought against the two Boer republics (boer means farmer in
Afrikaans) of the Transvaal and the Orange Free State. The war was forced upon a reluctant
government in London by imperial idealists and by Cape Colony businessmen intent on
control of the regions gold fields, but once committed the British regarded victory as
essential for their international prestige. The Boer republics were European-model colonial
states with access to international contacts and trade, armed and militarily equipped at least as
well as the British, but with an irregular army and little acceptance of European laws or
conventions of war. In a pattern typical of colonial warfare, the British suffered some defeats
due to unpreparedness, followed by a successful campaign leading to the occupation and
annexation of both countries within a year, as part of the new Republic of South Africa. The
Boers enjoyed considerable international political support, including volunteer contingents of

226
Quoted in Walter Laqueur, Guerrilla: A Historical and Critical Study (1977)
144

which the largest were two Fenian Irish brigades, each of about 100 men. The Fenians of
the IRB also made the offer, shocking at the time and not accepted, of sinking a British troop
transport ship by placing a bomb on board. After the annexations in 1900, a hard core of
Boers, regarded by the British as rebels in law, resorted to guerrilla warfare which lasted a
further 18 months. These bitter enders depended on support from their farms and
homesteads. To remove this support the British resorted to a system of fortified posts and
blockhouses, barbed wire fences, mounted patrols, farm burning, and to internment camps,
known at the time as concentration camps, in which over 20,000 women and children died
of disease.
227

Although Britain was not yet a democracy, the era of mass politics had already begun. A
vocal minority of opponents of the war in Britain, known to their enemies as the pro-Boers,
argued that it was being fought for narrow commercial interests, and that the methods
employed were contrary to the laws of war. Revelations in the press of British Army
methods in the guerrilla phase produced a scandal, particularly as the government claimed
that the war had ended. In a speech in 1901 the Liberal Leader of the Opposition, Sir Henry
Campbell-Bannerman (1836-1908), proclaimed:
A phrase often used is war is war. But when one comes to ask about it, one is told that
no war is going on that it is not war. When is a war not a war? When it is carried on by
methods of barbarism in South Africa.
! Quoted in Thomas Pakenham, The Boer War (1979)
Altogether 448,435 troops fought in the war of which 256,000 were British Army regulars.
Total Boer forces were never greater than about 60,000, and the bitter enders no more than
20,000 men. The final peace settlement in 1902 confirmed the British annexation, and was

227
One lasting claim is that the British invented the concentration camp. The term, meaning a camp where
troops or others are concentrated, gained notoriety in the Spanish counterinsurgency campaigns in Cuba in the
1880s and 90s. In the 1930s Germany deliberately chose the name for its detention and punishment camps for
political and social prisoners, and death camps for ethnic undesirables in order to disguise their true nature.
143

sufficiently moderate for most South Africans to support the British Empire in the First
World War. The wars unresolved issues plagued South Africa for the rest of the century.
British methods in South Africa were very much those of colonial warfare as outlined
in Callwells Small Wars. But the frustrating experience of a few thousand bitter enders
tying down many times their own number of troops in an expensive and protracted war was
typical. The United States, which had annexed the Philippines from Spain in 1898, faced
similar problems in a guerrilla revolt of 1899-1902, the first of a number of insurgencies
conducted by Filipino separatists or nationalists. These experiences led to arguments that
imperial expansion had reached its limits, and also that new military methods were required
to deal with revolt.
The first ideas of 20th century counterinsurgency emphasising political as well as
military factors, winning the support of the target population and drawing on local
knowledge, came from French Army theorist Louis Hubert Gonsalve Lyautey (1842-1934).
The practical application of these ideas came in Indochina (modern Vietnam, Cambodia and
Laos), a French colony since 1862. In the northern part, Tonkin China (close to the Chinese
border), the French faced a serious threat from pirates who included nationalists enjoying
considerable local support. In 1892 Joseph Simon Gallini (1849-1916) arrived to take
command, joined by Lyautey in 1894. Gallini believed that the French Army needed an
administrative and social function in colonial warfare. Mobile columns would attack the
pirates themselves, while the French largely respected local culture in an effort to improve
the life of the people, rather than attempting to destroy traditional structures. One distinctive
feature of the Gallini method was that, although it emphasised the link between the
military campaign and civil administration, both were in the hands of the military
commander.
146

Lyautey coined the term tache dhuile (oil stain) for this method: pacification extending
outwards from individual villages like drops of oil on blotting paper, until the areas became
joined together. In Tonkin China it worked so well that by 1896 the region was effectively
pacified. Lyauteys analysis of the campaign used ideas and phrases that would be endlessly
repeated in 20th century counterinsurgency:
The pirate is a plant which will grow only in certain soils, and the surest method is to
make the soil uncongenial to himArmed occupation, with or without fighting, is as the
ploughshare; the establishment of a military cordon fences it and isolates it definitely, if an
internal frontier is in question; and finally the organisation and reconstitution of the
population, its arming, the setting up of markets and various cultivations, the driving of roads,
are all like the sowing of the good grain, and render the conquered region impervious to
brigandage.
! Quoted in Robert B. Asprey, War in the Shadows (1994)
Lyautey repeated the method successfully in other French colonies, including
Madagascar in 1896-1900 under Gallini as colonial governor, followed by campaigns in
Algeria 1903-10, and Morocco 1912-25, where Lyautey functioned effectively as political-
military dictator.
228
Lyautey viewed these campaigns as part of a wider philosophy of the
civilising role of the French Army, establishing its position in French political and cultural
life; increasingly, he regarded the civil state and its political apparatus as something to be
circumvented. This caused problems later, not always in French campaigns, from officers
who lacked Lyauteys skills and patriotic commitment. The extremely successful tache
dhuile was copied by many countries as a standard counterinsurgency method.
In the First World War, all sides encouraged insurrections and revolutionary
movements in enemy-controlled countries. The Germans backed an abortive Boer uprising
against the British in South Africa in 1914, as well as revolts in British India. When the first
Russian Revolution took place in March 1917, Vladimir Lenin was in exile in Zurich. He

228
Both men also saw distinguished service on the Western Front in the First World War, Gallini particularly
for the defence of Paris during the Battle of the Marne in September 1914.
147

was allowed passage through Germany in a sealed train since the Germans believed he would
ferment further trouble for Russia. Lenin succeeded beyond expectation, playing together
with Leon Trotsky (born Lev Davidovich Bronstein 1879-1940) a leading role in the
subsequent October Revolution with coups in Moscow and Petrograd (modern St.
Petersburg, then Russias capital city) followed by a series of wars that lasted until 1923 and
established the Soviet Union.
229

In the traditions of peoples war, Lenin and Trotsky regarded revolutionaries in other
countries and guerrilla or irregular forces as an integral part of their political and military
strategy. But like other followers of Marx, they had absorbed Clausewitzs ideas on war, and
saw guerrilla warfare by itself as ineffective. The importance of the success of the Russian
Revolution for the history of the 20th century cannot be overstated. But almost as important
for the development of insurgency was the British (and also French) support for the Arab
revolt against the Ottoman Turkish Empire 1916-18 led by Emir Imal Faisal (1883-1933,
King of Iraq from 1921). The main British campaign was a conventional advance from
Egypt through Turkish Palestine 1917-18, for which they saw the insurrectionists as useful
support. They supplied arms and liaison officers, the most famous of who was the
archaeologist and Arabist turned soldier, T. E. Lawrence (Lawrence of Arabia 1888-1935).
Rather than trying to convert desert Arabs into conventional forces, the Arab Revolt
used their traditional military strength of desert mobility on camel and horseback, together
with British weapons, to launch attacks on Turkish garrisons and railway communications.
Politically the Turks could not afford to withdraw without losing control of the region; but
they did not have the forces to defend the railway properly. The Arab Revolt tied down

229
Due to the continued use of the Julian Calendar, the October revolution took place in November 1917,
followed by the Russian Civil War 1917-19 in which a number of countries sent intervention forces including
Britain, and the effectively contiguous Russo-Polish War of 1919-23, in which Soviet troops came within
measurable distance of extending the revolution into Germany.
148

Turkish forces many times larger than itself, as well as provided important support for the
main British campaign. Lawrence became a legendary figure both during and after the war,
particularly through his book, Seven Pillars of Wisdom (1927) and wrote most of the entry on
Guerrilla for the 1929 Encyclopaedia Britannica. He stressed the political, social and
psychological aspects of guerrilla warfare, including the common argument that guerrillas
and their methods possessed a mystical superiority over conventional forces:
[The experience of the Arab Revolt] strengthened the belief that irregular war or rebellion
could be proved an exact science, and an inevitable success, granted certain factors and
pursued along certain linesIn fifty words: granted mobility, security (in the form of
denying targets to the enemy), time, and doctrine (the idea to convert every subject to
friendliness), victory will rest with the insurgents, for the algebraeical factors are in the
end decisive, and against them perfection of means and spirit struggle quite in vain.

! Encyclopaedia Britannica 14
th
Edition, under Guerrilla (1929)
Lawrence influenced British views of both conventional and irregular warfare,
particularly through his association with the inter-war theorist Basil Liddell Hart. They both
emphasised psychology and mobility as an aim in itself, and shared the belief that small
forces could have an effect out of all proportion to their size. The contrast with the Western
Front also made Lawrence a symbol of the belief that conventional military thinking was in
itself inadequate. His ideas bear comparison with Liddell Harts concept of the indirect
approach and modern manoeuvrist thinking about guerrilla warfare:
There is a felt element in troops, not expressible in figures, and the greatest commander
is he whose intuitions most nearly happen. Nine-tenths of tactics are certain, and taught in
books: but the irrational tenth is like the kingfisher flashing across the pool and that is the
test of generals. It can only be ensured by instinct, sharpened by thought [and] practising
the stroke so often that at the crisis it is as natural as a reflex.
! Encyclopaedia Britannica 14
th
Edition, under Guerrilla (1929)
In Britain, rather than establishing the superiority of guerrillas over conventional forces,
the desert campaign helped foster the idea of what would now be called Special Forces. But
it also acted as an important inspiration for future Arab insurgents.
149

The Anglo-Irish War, 1919-21
Even more important in the history and theory of insurgency, especially for Britain, was
the only case in 20th century Western Europe of a successful insurgency leading to the
creation of an independent country under the rule of the insurgents: the Anglo-Irish War
1919-21. Irish success was a complicated mix of political and military factors. British
governments had first tried to give Ireland its political independence in 1886. In 1902 the
Fenian political party Sinn Fein (ourselves alone) was founded. In 1912 the Irish Home
Rule Act was passed, which would have given Ireland independence at the end of 1914. This
was opposed by the dominant minority in Northern Ireland, the chiefly Protestant Ulster
Unionists, who enjoyed support from the Conservative Party and among senior Army
officers of Irish descent, and who at once formed the Ulster Volunteer Force (UVF), an
illegal armed militia. By 1914 Ireland was on the verge of open civil war, in which the
British Armys loyalties were by no means clear.
230
On the outbreak of the First World War
the Home Rule Act was suspended. The Ulster Unionists, in a calculated political move,
transformed the UVF into the 36
th
Ulster Division, a volunteer formation of the British Army,
on the basis that if they fought for Britain this established their right to remain part of the
United Kingdom.
231
The strain of the First World War increased problems in Ireland,
particularly in January 1916 when conscription was introduced for the rest of the United
Kingdom. Led by James Connolly (1870-1916), the IRB staged in April 1916 the Easter
Rising, an almost-farcical attempt to seize the centre of Dublin, but which in the event was
suppressed by British troops. The British decision to execute 15 ringleaders, viewed as
traitors in the middle of the war, turned them into martyrs.

230
In the April 1914 Curragh Incident, Army officers of the garrison in Ireland, believing that they were about
to be given orders to suppress the UVF by force, resigned en masse. The situation was defused and later claimed
as a misunderstanding.
231
The 36th Ulster Division was one of the most successful fighting divisions on the Western Front, taking
heavy casualties on 1 July 1916, the first day of the Battle of the Somme, which became an important symbol.
At the Battle of Messines in June 1917 they attacked side-by-side with the 16
th
South Irish Division, an event
commemorated by a memorial on Messines ridge in 1999.
130

By 1918 circumstances had changed considerably. Britain was war-weary and needed
political and economic support from the United States, which had considerable sympathy
both for Ireland and for independence movements. Prime Minister David Lloyd George
(1863-1945, in power 1916-22) was also sympathetic, but headed a coalition government
dominated by Conservatives and Ulster Unionists,
232
blocking attempts to implement the
1912 settlement. In the 1918 British general election, Sinn Fein under the American-born
Eamon De Valera (1882-1975), won a majority of Irish seats and, refusing to come to
London, formed itself instead into an Irish parliament.
233
Simultaneously, in January 1919,
what was now the Irish Republican Army (IRA) under Michael Collins (1890-1922) began
guerrilla attacks throughout Ireland. The IRA campaign under De Valera and Collins became
known as a strategy of denial (a term also used by Lawrence), in which maintaining the
guerrilla force actively in existence was more important than any military objective. As
described by an IRA veteran of the 1918-1921 fighting:
Guerrilla tactics can never achieve against a regularly organised army a military decision.
What they can do is to create what is really a political situation whereby government by
the big battalions becomes impossible: a situation that may be dragged out to an indefinite
length and that may ultimately achieve for the side adopting these methods the same result
as might be achieved by a decisive military victory.
! Quoted in M. L. R. Smith, Fighting for Ireland? The Military Strategy of the Irish
Republican Movement (1995)
In Dublin, Collins mounted a terrorist campaign against the Royal Irish Constabulary
(RIC), with an emphasis on denying the enemy information. In the countryside, IRA flying
columns carried out attacks against police stations and other isolated targets, forcing the RIC
to abandon them. In response, the RIC was supplemented both by the Army and by
paramilitary forces, the Volunteers and the Auxiliaries, former soldiers colloquially

232
For many years the partys official title was The Conservative and Unionist Party.
233
Constance, Countess Markowitz, standing as a Sinn Fein candidate, became the first woman to be elected a
British MP, but did not take her seat.
131

known as the Black and Tans.
234
The resulting campaign of terror and counter-terror tied
down 80,000 British troops and 15,000 police and paramilitaries against an IRA force no
larger than 3,000 men. With the reductions in the British Army after the First World War and
the need to police the Empire, this was not a commitment that Britain could afford.
In 1920 the British passed the Government of Ireland Act, establishing two separate
Irish parliaments, including one for Ulster. In military terms the IRA was almost defeated,
and both sides were anxious for a compromise peace. A ceasefire in 1921 was followed by
the Treaty of London, partitioning Ireland to create in 1922 an Irish Free State. Part of
Ulster remained part of what was now The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland. De Valera and others refused to accept anything but complete independence for the
whole of Ireland, and the result was the Irish Civil War 1922-23 in which Collins was killed.
In 1937 the new Irish constitution changed the countrys name to Eire, claiming sovereignty
over all Ireland but accepting the existing frontier, and in 1948 Eire was declared a republic.
The IRAs methods inspired British thinking on sabotage and subversion in the Second
World War, particularly for the Special Operations Executive (SOE). British theorists of the
inter-war years continued to advocate methods of imperial policing based on coercion. The
RAF in particular saw this as a major role for itself, by punitive bombing of rebel villages.
But as early as 1927 at least one theorist, B. C. Dearing, published work which was also
influenced by the Irish experience. He outlined what was to become the dominant form of
insurgency in the developed world: a political-military campaign based on propaganda,
coercion, attacks on financial targets, and on influencing domestic public opinion.
The Anglo-Irish War illustrates important themes in insurgency warfare. It has been
common for armed forces to claim that they almost won but were betrayed by a political

234
The name comes from their wearing black RIC caps with their khaki Army uniforms.
132

settlement; but the issue was not whether the IRA could defeat the British Army and RIC but
whether Ireland could and should be governed by massive military force without popular
support. Both sides recognised that they could not achieve a military victory, and were
prepared to accept a compromise peace. As in the Boer War, and in contrast to many
conventional wars, mutual allegations of brutality made even basic facts about the war hard
to establish, and left a legacy of bitterness. Intelligence, the need for popular support, and the
wider political context including the international context were all fundamental to the
settlement. The political strategy of solving an intractable situation by partition and
withdrawal became popular in Britain during the retreat from Empire, including the partitions
effected in India in 1947and Palestine in 1947-48, and proposed for Cyprus in 1955-60. Even
when it succeeded, this practice left long-term issues unresolved, and often led to renewed
conflict; it was seen very much as the least-bad option.
Mao Tse-tung and the Chinese Experience
Western military thinking on counterinsurgency in the Cold War was dominated by the
model of insurgency that emerged from China at the end of the Second World War. The
United States had promoted Nationalist China as one of the five permanent members of the
United Nations Security Council, the five policemen of the world. The defeat of the
Nationalists by the Communists under Mao and the establishment of the Peoples Republic of
China in 1949 was shocking and incomprehensible. It led to claims of a new and unstoppable
method of insurgency warfare that as in the past was described by both its advocates and
enemies in mystical terms.
The context for the Maoist model of insurgency was a protracted series of civil wars
and interventions in China of almost unbelievable complexity, reaching back into the 19th
century. Although themselves of great historical significance, the actual events are less
133

important for 20th century insurgency than the doctrines derived from them. Similarly, and
as with Clausewitz, Maoist insurgency doctrine itself and the uses made of it are more
important than whether Mao himself deserves the entire credit for its development.
Specifically for British counterinsurgency, the Maoist model is important chiefly for the
Malayan Emergency 1948-60, and indirectly for the Vietnam War of 1961-75 (during which
period US combat forces were active from 1965 to 1973).
The Manchu Empire collapsed in the revolution of 1911, ushering in a period of
virtually continuous factional and civil wars until 1949. China broke up into warlordships,
many the size of European countries. While many Chinese cities, almost all of them either
ports or close to the eastern seaboard, were industrially advanced and modern, the vast
majority of the Chinese of the interior remained poor peasants whose lifestyle had hardly
changed for centuries. In this confused situation the Chinese Nationalist Party (Kuomintang
or KMT, now transliterated as Guomindang) attempted to secure power by political and
military methods. The Autumn Harvest uprising of 1927, a violent confrontation in the
cities between the Nationalists and the Chinese Communist Party (founded 1921), led to the
communists taking refuge in the Kiangsi region of southern China, establishing military
bases. By 1935 Mao Tse-tung had emerged as the dominant communist leader.
Conventional military wisdom in China was that rule of the country depended on
control of the cities; and this accorded with Lenins view that the cities were the key to the
revolution. But gradually Mao came to the argument that a great rural peasant uprising
would provide the power-base that the communists needed. In 1931 the KMT military
launched the first of a series of bandit annihilation (or encirclement) campaigns against
the communist strongholds. The success of the Fifth Annihilation Campaign led the
communists in October 1934 to the desperate measure of the Long March, an almost
mythical event in Chinese history. Their entire Communist forces and civilian population
134

moved out across the country, reaching safety in Shansi province in northern China in
December 1935, an area where the Nationalist regime was too weak to pose a direct threat.
In 1936 the Communists and Nationalists agreed a united front against the Japanese,
who had annexed Manchuria by force in 1931.
235
In 1937 the Japanese invaded China itself,
overrunning the major cities and perpetrating the notorious rape of Nanking. The
Communists were not a major threat to the Japanese except briefly in the Hundred
Regiments campaign of 1940 (a Chinese regiment was usually three or four battalions),
which in turn prompted a Japanese counterinsurgency policy known as the Three All
Strategy: burn all, kill all, destroy all.
Relations between the United States and Japan over China had become openly
hostile,
236
and in December 1941 the Japanese attacked the British, French and Dutch
colonial possessions in South East Asia, as well as of course the US Pacific Fleet at Pearl
Harbor. This made the war in China part of the Second World War, in which the Nationalist
effort was increasingly part of American grand strategy. By the Japanese defeat in 1945, the
Communists had become organised as a conventional army superior to that of the
Nationalists, who they then defeated. The Nationalists retreated to Taiwan (or Formosa) and
kept the fifth permanent seat on the UN Security Council until the United States recognised
Communist China in 1972.
The actual conduct of the wars of 1927-49 reveals little consistent pattern in the
Communist methods other than pragmatism. Both guerrilla and warlord armies (including
that of the KMT) had a low tolerance for casualties and a reluctance to seek battle, since their
armed forces were also their political base. The Japanese, suffering from severe overstretch,

235
The Japanese renamed the country Manchukuo in 1932, placing the last emperor Pu-yi (also known as
Kang-te) on the throne.
236
This included the United States supplying arms and mercenaries to the Chinese Nationalists, including the
famous Flying Tigers fighter unit.
133

also could not commit large forces to China. But a compromise peace between the
Communists and the Nationalists, or with the Japanese, was impossible since all sides aspired
to control the country absolutely. The scale of the fighting and high level of civilian
involvement also gave the war in China many of the characteristics of Total War.
Mao derived from this experience an underlying doctrine of insurgency known in China
as peoples war, bearing some resemblance to 19th century peoples war. Mao himself
described the early period of fighting in 1927-34 against the Nationalists and the later period
of 1941-45 against the Japanese as most characteristic of peoples war. His fundamental idea
was that a strong political and institutional base among the Chinese peasant village
population would provide an unassailable position from which to operate. The use of
guerrillas in conjunction with conventional forces had many historical precedents, and was
also part of Soviet Deep Operations doctrine in the Great Patriotic War 1941-45, using
partisans in the war against the railways to disrupt German logistics.
What was new in Maos approach was the systematic manner in which these ideas were
combined to form an overall doctrine, particularly in the fusing of military and political
strategies. Mao linked guerrilla war with a coherent political strategy and conventional
warfare to make it a powerful force. Mao was also good at reducing the complex ideas of
insurgency to simple slogans, repeated until they had the status of proverbs or folk-wisdom.
Maos starting point was that of a pragmatic politician, analysing how in China of the 1920s
the Communists could gain political power. His answer, in a famous slogan, was that In
China, political power grows from the barrel of a gun, meaning that negotiated political
routes to power, economic and social disruption, and coups detat had all failed, and that the
military route was the one to follow. Mao drew on old Chinese cultural traditions to argue
that the real measure of military power was will or determination to outlast the enemy. This
led him to favour Protracted War to wear down the enemy over a long period of time.
136

In practical terms, this took the form of basing the guerrilla movement in the peasant
villages, a mutually beneficial arrangement whereby the peasantry provided logistic support,
information, and a secure base area, while the revolutionaries provided education,
assistance and land reform. While guerrillas had traditionally operated on the fringes of
society, Mao insisted that the guerrilla must be in the population like fishes in the ocean.
The great strength of this system was that whereas one major defeat was enough to disperse
most guerrilla uprisings, Maos guerrillas could return to village life as peasants until the
threat diminished, preserving their basic infrastructure intact.
Maos village structure was vulnerable in two respects, first of which that his guerrillas
could lose the support of the peasant population. He may have been the first person to use
the phase hearts and minds in this context, and he certainly emphasised education and
indoctrination in his methods.
237
The other vulnerability was if the enemy simply destroyed
the village structure, as the British had done to Boer farmsteads in 1900-02. This method was
used by the KMT in the Fifth Annihilation Campaign on the advice of Colonel-General Hans
von Seeckt (commander of the German Armed Forces 1919-26). It was also the basis of the
Japanese Three All strategy, again deriving from German methods and attitudes towards
guerrillas.
For his guerrilla methods, Mao drew on ancient Chinese texts, notably fictional classics
such as The Water Margin
238
and The Romance of the Three Kingdoms (which Mao believed
to be factual); and the writings of Sun Tsu, who probably flourished in the Age of the
Warring States in China (450-300 BC), a period in which Chinas political structure was
similar to that of the warlord era of 1911-49. There is a close similarity between Sun Tsus
writings and Maos formula for guerrilla operations, a slogan that in the original is only 16

237
Other candidates for this early use of hearts and minds as a phrase as well as an idea include the British
Indian Army of the 1920s.
238
The subject of a Japanese television series shown on British television in the 1970s.
137

characters long: The enemy advances, we retreat; the enemy camps, we harass; the enemy
tires, we attack; the enemy retreats, we pursue. However, Mao never saw guerrilla warfare
as anything but a means to an end, writing that guerrilla units formed from the people may
gradually develop into regular units and when operating as such, employ the tactics of
orthodox mobile warfare.
239

In the 1961 edition of his translation of Maos 1937 work On Guerrilla Warfare, which
was very influential on American political and military thinking in the Vietnam War,
Brigadier General Samuel Griffith USMC characterised Maos doctrine as Protracted
Revolutionary War of which guerrilla war was only an aspect:
Mao conceived of this type of war as passing through a series of merging phases, the first
of which is devoted to organisation, consolidation and preservation of the regional base
areasIn the second phase, acts of sabotage and terrorism multiply; collaborationists and
reactionary elements are liquidated. Attacks are made on vulnerable military and police
outposts; weak columns are ambushedFollowing Phase I (organisation, consolidation
and preservation) and Phase II (progressive expansion) comes Phase III: decision, or
destruction of the enemy. During this period a significant percentage of the active
guerrilla force completes its gradual transformation into an orthodox establishment
capable of engaging the enemy in decisive battles.

In his On Protracted War of 1938 Mao used the three-phase structure in a slightly
different way to describe his proposed strategy against the Japanese: an initial period of
strategic weakness in which the Communists would rely on mobile and guerrilla warfare to
drag out the expected Japanese offensive; a period of strategic stalemate in which over-
extended Japanese forces would be harassed and weakened by guerrillas; and finally a
conventional offensive backed by guerrilla operations to recover the lost territory. Maos
view of conventional operations mixed Soviet deep operations with the German stress on
annihilation by encirclement, methods popular in both Chinese and Japanese military staff
colleges. He emphasised the importance of assembling overwhelming force, and of never

239
Quoted in Samuel B. Griffith, Mao Tse-Tung on Guerrilla Warfare (1961)
138

engaging in battle unless certain of destroying the enemy. His view of logistics was that
supplies that could not be produced by the peasant village culture should be obtained where
possible by attacking or tapping into the enemy supply lines. We have a claim on the output
of the arsenals of London as well as of Hanyang [modern Hupei], and what is more, it is to be
delivered to us by the enemys own transport corps.
Maos protracted war envisaged a long drawn-out campaign using both guerrilla and
conventional forces together. Most insurgencies since Mao have been won or lost before the
guerrillas develop conventional forces, so Maoist insurgency doctrine has often been
regarded as synonymous with guerrilla war. In the 1980s the British Army doctrinal term to
describe it was Revolutionary Guerrilla War (RGW). But in all his writings, Mao
emphasised cultural and political conditions, and seeing every operation of war in the
perspective of the whole effort to achieve power, rather than guerrilla operations as such.
Maos success came not only from his political and military exploitation of the situation in
China itself. Also critical to victory were his ability to establish secure base areas for his
forces, and the impact of intervention from outside, notably assistance from the Soviet Union
in 1945, Japanese intervention as enemies 1937-45, and the United States influence on
Nationalist strategy in the period 1941-49.
Mao and Communist Chinese military theorists after 1949 believed that they had
created a new form of warfare, that peoples war was like land warfare, air warfare and naval
warfare, a fundamental military activity, and that it could be applied elsewhere as long as the
necessary cultural and political adjustments were made. A recent American study has
commented that:
The main elements of Peoples War continued to be a politically motivated and organised
peasantry, willing to suffer in order to deny both intelligence and supply to invading
enemy columns, attrition by communist guerrilla units, and defeat in detail by communist
regular forces. For Mao and his supporters, it remained important to stress the political,
139

peasant-mobilisation aspects of military strategy: doing so served the twin purposes of
denying that non-Maoist regimes could ever imitate or defeat the strategy of Peoples War,
and of claiming for Mao and China a position of originality and leadership within the
world communist movement.
! Edward L. Dreyer, China at War 1901-1949 (1995)
The end of the Second World War produced a potential power vacuum in South East
Asia. The weakened European colonial powers mainly prepared to withdraw, while the
initial Japanese victories had shown that Asian troops could defeat Europeans, and that their
empires lacked the resources to hold the region by military force. Maoist-inspired
insurgencies occurred in countries where part of the population had close links with mainland
China, and where the insurgents had experience fighting the Japanese occupation, which had
also disrupted organised government.
The Malayan Emergency 1948-60, fought against the British, marked a critical defeat
for the Maoist approach. The Huk (Hukbalahap) revolt in the Philippines, which became
independent in 1946 but depended on American support, lasted from 1946 to 1954 and ended
inconclusively. The insurgency against the returning French in Vietnam, known as the First
Indochina War (1946-54), as did the Second Indochina War or Vietnam War (1961-75), from
which the United States withdrew in 1973.
That the worlds strongest country had been defeated by Maoist methods (as well as
North Vietnamese regular forces) made a tremendous impression. From the 1950s onwards
many Western specialists painted a gloomy picture of the entire developing world, from the
Far East through to Africa and the Middle East, and then South and Central America, falling
victim to this mysterious new form of warfare, which would surround and isolate the
democracies of Western Europe and North America. As late as 1986, one influential
American specialist on Vietnam described Maoist insurgency strategy as having no known
counterstrategy. Two years later, a retired US Army general expressed the same view: Sad
160

to say, we cannot counter revolutionary war even now our defeat in Vietnam has taught us
nothing.
240
In contrast to earlier experiences, in the 20th century it came to be expected that
this war of the military weak against the military strong would most likely succeed. This
apparent paradox became one of the most important issues in Western, including British,
military thinking.

Insurgency and Counterinsurgency, 1945-75

Introduction

After the Second World War, insurgency became by far the most common form of
warfare around the world, accounting for about 90 per cent of all cases: at least 300 wars in
50 years, several lasting for decades.
241
Civilian casualties vastly outnumbered military in all
these wars. Many insurgencies were anti-colonial or nationalist revolts showing common
characteristics with the Maoist style, interpreted in the West as part of a Soviet strategy for
global domination.
British examples of non-communist insurgencies characterised at the time as being
Soviet-inspired include the successful Zionist revolt against British control of Palestine
(1945-47), which led to the creation of Israel; the Mau-Mau insurgency in Kenya (1952-59)

240
Douglas Pike, PAVN: Peoples Army of Vietnam (1986); Phillip B. Davidson, Vietnam at War: The History
1946-1976 (1988).
241
As OOTW these were strictly not wars in current doctrine, and were often described at the time by other
terms such as Emergency, Revolt, Confrontation, The Troubles etc, just as the Korean War was called a police
action.
161

as a result of which Kenya became independent in 1961 and Mau-Mau leader Jomo Kenyatta
(1889-1978) became its first president), and the Greek nationalist EOKA insurgency on
Cyprus (1955-60), which led to the islands independence in a compromise peace.
242
As the
case of Cyprus shows, together with that of Cuba (1956-59) and Sri Lanka (1983-2009),
insurgencies have taken place on islands with varying degrees of success. But one of the
strongest forms of a Maoist safe base area is that which is across a political frontier, and
cannot be attacked.
Many insurgencies in this period were also proxy wars, requiring their opponents to
deal simultaneously with both international (inter-state) and internal (intra-state) issues. A
clear illustration is the Mozambique Civil War (1974-92) following independence from
Portugal. In 1977 the government of Rhodesia decided to sponsor the Mozambique National
Resistance (MNR or Renamo), since Mozambique was harbouring anti-Rhodesian guerrillas.
In 1979 Rhodesia became Zimbabwe, and South Africa became Renamos new principal
supporter, as part of its own strategy of weakening the front line states to its north. The
resulting civil war in Mozambique lasted until South Africa withdrew its support as part of its
own transition to majority rule in 1994.
A British regional specialist commented:
Most countries have ethnic, regional or language minorities who often have legitimate
grievances and who protest about their cultures being marginalised and their regions being
economically disadvantaged. These include Friesians in the Netherlands, Bretons in
France, Welsh in BritainConsider, then, what would happen if a powerful and wealthy
neighbouring state inflamed that dissent, trained and organised guerrillas, provided arms
and sabotage teams, set up a radio station, and launched an international propaganda
campaign to boost the credibility of the new movementMozambique is poor and weak
and hasnt much chance against the South-African backed MNR.
! Joseph Hanlon, Apartheids Second Front (1986)

242
These were particularly promoted as Communist by the Foreign Offices clandestine Information Research
Department (IRD), closed down in 1977, whose job was to provide propaganda in support of British
counterinsurgency campaigns for the British and foreign media.
162

Recent accusations of states using (or alleged by their enemies to be using) insurgency as
proxy war include support by Pakistan for the separatist movement in Assam against India
1998-2001.
Increasingly, counterinsurgency has been seen as a fight for control of the countrys
civilian population. One strategy is to treat them as an enemy and destroy the social fabric
(which involves attacks on civilians of an often brutal nature) to win them over by political,
economic and psychological means while providing military protection. In both cases the
central issue is how to break the link between the civilian population and the insurgents, who
can then be fought directly. Common methods that date back to the Boer War include the use
of physical barriers such as defended fence lines, and the relocation of the population, often
forcibly. In the more benign versions of counterinsurgency, this has involved a move to new
villages which offer a higher standard of living.
In the Cold War a closely related counterinsurgency issue was whether to treat
insurgents as primarily nationalists, emphasising local factors, or as principally Soviet-backed
Communists, emphasising wider global interests and expecting methods that worked in one
country to work in another. These decisions were seldom straightforward, particularly when
facing a combination of conventional and guerrilla forces. A substantial guerrilla campaign
began in South Korea in 1948 and continued throughout the Korean War 1950-53, leading
the United States to believe during the early part of the Vietnam War (up to about 1965) that
the Viet Cong campaign in South Vietnam was also preparation for a mass conventional
invasion.
Increasingly as domestic political attitudes changed and international media coverage
of wars improved, democratic Western countries found that destroying farms and villages,
employing terror tactics, or causing mass civilian casualties, were not politically acceptable
163

options. Senior officers who had previously thought of themselves as soldiers not involved in
politics accepted the political-military nature of insurgency warfare. Many countries created
special military units for counterinsurgency. The British Special Air Service (SAS) was
formed in 1948 to operate in Malaya.
243
The United States created the Central Intelligence
Agency (CIA) in 1947 partly to conduct covert operations around the world, and the US
Army Special Forces (The Green Berets) in 1952.

French Counterinsurgency

Indochina, 1946-54

A controversial French style of counterinsurgency also developed in the Cold War,
called Guerre rvolutionnaire (revolutionary war). The French Empire in Indochina
consisted of Laos, Cambodia and Vietnam (divided by the French into Tonkin China, Annam
and Cochin China). By the end of the Second World War a well-organised Vietnamese
insurgency movement existed, the Viet Minh under Ho Chi Minh,
244
with a Maoist-style
village guerrilla structure and mobile forces. They had fought against the Japanese, receiving
support from the United States as part of its own campaign in the Far East, and in September
1945 they entered Hanoi, expecting Allied political recognition as the government of
Vietnam.

243
The SAS had a previous existence in the Second World War, in a rather different form. Disbanded in 1945, it
was recreated in 1948 as The Malay Scouts (Special Air Service) out of the Artists Rifles, the only case of a
Territorial Army unit being parent to a Regular Army one.
244
Ho worked in London and Paris from 1912 to 1918, and was in Moscow in 1922. His chosen name, Ho Chi
Minh means approximately he who brings liberation.Viet Minh is a shortening of Viet Nam Doc Lap
Dong Minh Hoi (Vietnamese Liberation Movement).
164

For France, seeking to recover from its defeats in the Second World War, retention of
its empire was essential to its standing in the world. The French Army also saw itself even
more than previously as the embodiment of French civilisation and values, the dominant
partner in colonial rule. The United States, seeing France as essential to post-war security in
Europe, and the creation of NATO, supported this policy. Particularly after the loss of China
in 1949 and the start of the Korean War in 1950, French colonial policy in Indochina and
American Containment policy coincided.
At first, the French tache dhuile methods coupled with mobile forces proved
successful. In December 1946 the French inflicted crushing defeats on the Viet Minh that
appeared to end the insurgency. Deeply embedded in Vietnamese society, however, the Viet
Minh resorted to a Maoist three-phase strategy of protracted war, as Ho Chi Minh explained
at its height in 1951:
The enemy schemed a lightning war. As they wanted to attack swiftly and win swiftly,
our Party and Government put forth the slogan Long-term Resistance War. The enemy
wanted to sow dissension among us, so our slogan was Unity of the Entire PeopleOur
Party and Government foresaw that our Resistance War has three stages. In the first stage
[1945-1947], all we did was to preserve and increase our main forces. In the second stage
[1947-1951], we have actively contended with the enemy and prepared for the general
counteroffensive. The third stage is the general counteroffensiveWe must understand
that each stage is linked with another, the second succeeds the first, and produces seeds for
the third. Many changes occur in the course of one stage to another. Each stage also has
changes of its ownIt is not possible to cut off completely one stage from the other like
cutting bread. The length of each stage depends on the situation at home and in the world,
and the changes between the enemy forces and ours.
! Political report read at the Second National Congress of the Viet-Nam Workers Party,
held in February 1951 quoted in Bernard B. Fall (ed.) Ho Chi Minh on Revolution
(1967)
The first Viet Minh attempt at a major offensive in 1951 was defeated, but large-scale
guerrilla war persisted. Severely overstretched and short of troops, in November 1953 the
French attempted to provoke a major conventional battle by establishing a base at the village
163

of Dien Bien Phu, deep in the jungle of the north-west. After an epic siege, the French
garrison was overrun in May 1954.
245
The peace settlement in Geneva gave independence to
Laos, Cambodia and Vietnam, temporarily divided at the 17
th
Parallel to aid a separation of
forces. Rival governments came to power in Vietnam, the Communists under Ho Chi Minh
in the North, and an American-backed regime in the South. From the Viet Minh perspective,
they had fought one protracted war and won half their country.

Algeria, 1954-62
As discussed, after 1945 France was confronted with national independence movements
in many parts of its colonies; major insurgencies raged in Madagascar (1947-48), Indochina
(1946-54) and Algeria (1954-62). Of all these conflicts the Algerian War was the bloodiest
and most costly and left deep scars both in France and in Algeria. It was also one of the most
prominent campaigns fought in the golden era of counterinsurgency. The French Army
developed a number of innovative counter-insurgency techniques, but despite a series of
military victories was unable to convert them into a favourable political outcome. Algeria
also revealed the importance of public opinion in a counterinsurgency.
Strictly speaking Algeria was not a colony, but part of homeland France. Since 1830
the French had occupied the country and invited settlers from the entire Western European
Mediterranean region to populate Algeria. These settlers, the pieds noirs (black feet), built up
a flourishing infrastructure, mainly in the cities of Algiers, Oran and Constantine, and formed
the new upper class. Algeria became a strictly divided two class society with a rich urban

245
As was common in colonial warfare, the French forces included Vietnamese, Algerians, Moroccans, and
units of the Foreign Legion.
166

European minority (about 1.2 million people or 13% of the Algerian population) and an
impoverished Muslim majority of Arab and Berber ethnicity.
In the Second World War many Muslims fought in the ranks of French colonial units
and helped to liberate the French motherland. After 1945 they demanded political autonomy,
but French security forces harshly suppressed civil unrest. The problems, however, persisted;
tensions between the pieds noirs and the Muslim population continued. The Toussaint Rouge
(Red All Saints Day) on 1 November 1954 is generally seen as the real starting point of the
insurgency. In the early hours of this day the insurgency movement, the Front de la
Libration Nationale (FLN or National Liberation Front) launched a series of bombings and
acts of sabotage against police and military targets during which 7 people were killed. The
French government responded by increasing the number of soldiers from about 56,000 to
83,000.
A socialist and Islamist independence movement, the FLN was relatively small in
numbers (at no point more than 30,000 men) with a poorly armed military wing, the Arme
de la Libration Nationale (ALN or National Liberation Army). The FLN tried to
compensate these shortcomings and also the initial lack of popular support through ruthless
terrorist acts and the most radical means. The political aim was nothing less than full national
independence; more moderate independence movements were eliminated.
In August 1955 the FLN revealed its true nature during the Philippeville massacres
when it murdered 71 pieds noirs and 52 Muslims in the most horrible way. The French
reaction was not long in the waiting: paras and security forces killed over 1,200 Muslims in
reprisals, many of the slain innocent civilians. The FLN achieved its aim: French security
forces had over-reacted and seemingly exposed their brutality. The Philippeville massacres
divided Algerian society for good, with already at this very early stage of the war
167

reconciliation becoming impossible and a political compromise no longer feasible. The two
options for the population were either to support the FLN or to be branded as a collaborator
with the French.
Not only the FLN, but also the pieds noirs quickly radicalised. The unstable and short-
lived governments of the French Fourth Republic did little to find a political solution to the
problem. Instead, Paris gave the Army or, more specifically the Colonial Army, a relatively
free hand in how to deal with the insurgency. Lacking governmental control and strategic
guidelines, the Army interpreted its mission to mean that the country was to remain Algrie
Franaise and accordingly rallied to the pieds noirs. Further reinforcements were sent to
Algeria, but this time not merely colonial troops, but also parts of the metropolitan (i.e.
mainland French) army with conscripts in its ranks. The number of troops garrisoned in
Algeria peaked at 500,000. In theory this constituted a very respectable number with which to
pacify the country.
The officers of the Colonial Army set their own strategy and applied the principles of
their Guerre Rvolutionnaire counterinsurgency theory with its two pillars of destruction
and construction and its overarching ideas of psychological warfare and influence, both in
within its own ranks and within the body of the civil population. The Army became obsessed
with population control, both physically and psychologically, as the Battle of Algiers in
1956-57 showed. The heavy-handed approach of the French paras put an end to FLN activity
in the Algerian capital, where their leadership was killed or arrested or from which it fled to
neighbouring countries. In short, after the Battle of Algiers the FLN virtually ceased to exist
in the city. However, this constituted only a short term success. The French partly owed their
victory to the widespread use of torture during the interrogations of suspects. It is wrong to
believe the entire French Army applied these questionable techniques, for this dirty job was
left to specialist interrogation units. Torture led to a huge controversy, not only in Algeria,
168

but also in France, where the Communists had denounced the war from the beginning. Even
on a global stage the French Army was seen as an evil force an image which FLN
propaganda had always portrayed and which the media happily conveyed to the public.
Until today the debate on torture has overshadowed more positive sides of the French
COIN campaign in Algeria, such as the construction phase. New schools were built, young
Algerians were enabled to start apprenticeships and modern settlements were erected. Many
Muslims seemed to see their future rather in an Algrie Franaise than in an independent
country governed by a radical FLN. The French recruited between 200,000 and 250,000
harkis, Muslim volunteers fighting on the French side. This was four times more than the
FLN could ever muster in their ranks. However, French financial resources always remained
limited. Many of the infrastructure projects did not materialise. Furthermore, the
construction phase, too, was driven by an obsession to control the population, as Colonel
Antoine Argoud, one of the key theorists of Guerre Rvolutionnaire, briefly summed it up:
Protect them, involve them, control them. Between 1 and 2 million Arabs and Berbers were
resettled, either voluntarily or by force. Whilst in military terms this allowed a better physical
control of the population, it also meant the destruction of traditional social life in many parts
of rural Algeria.
The Algerian War put an ever heavier strain on French economics and domestic
politics. The Communist Party, which represented about a quarter of the French voters,
openly supported the insurgents cause. The war had largely slipped out of the hands of the
politicians in Paris, whilst in Algeria the alliance between hardcore pieds noirs and the
Colonial Army categorically ruled out any form of autonomy. They feared the French
political class would abandon them, just like they had abandoned Indochina five years earlier.
As a consequence, in May 1958 the Army seized governmental powers in Algiers and
threatened to remove the government in France. Airborne forces were ready to be parachuted
169

into Paris. The Army demanded the assumption to power of Charles de Gaulle, as they hoped
the Second World War hero would have a firmer hold on politics in Algeria. The Fourth
French Republic collapsed and de Gaulle formed a new government.
In his first visit to Algiers he greeted the pieds noirs community with his famous
words: Je vous ai compris! (I have understood you!), but in reality de Gaulle knew that the
war was lost not in Algeria, but on the international stage. For some time international
opinion had turned against France, whose Army seemed to systematically violate human
rights. Amongst various Arab states, notably Egypt, the FLN had found important allies who
voiced demands for independence in the UN General Assembly. The Algerian War was no
longer a French problem but rather an international issue.
Ironically, at the same time, in 1958-59, the French Army had nearly won the war. A
sophisticated system of military bases (quadrillage) enabled the French to hold the ground
that had been cleared from insurgents, with small and mobile commandos de chasse (hunting
detachments) driving the ALN out of areas which were difficult to access. All the insurgents
logistical support from neighbouring Morocco and Tunisia was effectively cut off by the
Morice Line, a barbed wire fence system supported by watchtowers and minefields. But
military victories alone never guarantee victory; Algeria demonstrated once more that war is
a political act.
President Charles de Gaulle wanted to bring this unwinnable and unpopular war to an
end. He held a referendum on Algerian self-determination which was approved by the vast
majority both in France and in Algeria. This angered the radical pieds noirs and the Colonial
Army. In April 1961 they staged a coup for a second time within three years. Since the
metropolitan Army as well as the majority of the Army in Algeria itself (amongst them
General Jacques Massu) stood loyal to de Gaulle, the coup quickly collapsed. The most
170

radical soldiers of the Colonial Army founded the Organisation de lArme Secrte (OAS or
Organisation of the Secret Army), a terrorist organisation which tried to mirror FLN tactics.
The project ultimately failed despite a nearly successful attempt on de Gaulles life.
On 19 March 1962 de Gaulle and the FLN leadership signed an agreement in Evian.
Algeria was granted full national independence, which was later legitimised by a referendum
in Algeria with 99.7% yes votes. This result did not come as a surprise: almost all of the
1.2 million pieds-noirs had fled the country in the weeks before, together with 100.000 harkis
and their families. Tens of thousands of harkis who could not flee Algeria in time were killed,
and large parts of the remaining population intimidated. Since its independence Algeria has
never come to terms with the legacy of this war and has remained an unstable country. The
war cost the lives of almost 30,000 French soldiers. The numbers of Algerian dead remain
obscure, ranging between 30,000 and 100,000 harkis and between 300,000 to 1.5 million
other Algerians, mostly civilians.
The Algerian War illustrates and highlights many of the problems with which a
counter-insurgent force is often faced. France won the war militarily, but lost it politically.
Many boots on the ground can indeed facilitate a military victory, but this remains futile if it
is not translated into a political outcome. Early in the war all governments in Paris shied
away from defining a coherent strategy with achievable political aims and a clear direction to
the Army in terms of how the war should be fought. When de Gaulle came to power in 1958
it was already too late to positively influence the outcome of the war. The French did not
follow the key Clauswitzian rule; military action was not used as an extension of politics.
Instead, French politics lost control over the campaign to such an extent that the Army not
only set their own strategy, but even interfered twice in French domestic politics by staging
two coups dtat. The Algerian War also shed light on the importance of the media and public
perception in a counterinsurgency campaign. Both the French Army and the FLN committed
171

many unlawful acts, but the world condemned unanimously only the French. In metropolitan
France the war became increasingly unpopular as many Frenchmen asked themselves
whether their Army was fighting for a good cause. The FLN moreover fully understood the
importance of propaganda and public opinion. Facing military defeat in Algeria they
consequently internationalised their cause, with this international support proving more
decisive than military action. Yet the FLN identified armed resistance as only one means to
achieve their political aim, for they won the war of ideas and the contest for legitimacy, even
if they proved inept in running the country after independence. Algeria was more than just an
extremely bloody and ruthless war between the French and Algerian Muslims; rather, it
exhibited many features of a globalised conflict and as such may be seen as a precursor of
many current conflicts.
Guerre rvolutionnaire, although not used since by France, remains a known
counterinsurgency technique that has its supporters. In the 1990s, during the Shining Path
insurgency in Peru (begun 1980), a so-called French school of the Peruvian Army strongly
advocated the use of a Guerre rvolutionnaire counterinsurgency strategy. There are also
some parallels with the methods used by the Israeli Defence Force (IDF) against the Intifada
insurgencies (1987-93 and 2000-2005). As with the Anglo-Irish War, Guerre rvolutionnaire
and the Algerian War illustrate recurring themes in counterinsurgency. In industrialised
conventional war, destruction of the enemy armed forces produced political victory, but in
counterinsurgency there was little relationship between killing the enemy and winning the
war. The methods the armed forces claimed were necessary to fight the war were a violation
of the values for which their countries stood, just as in 18th century Europe wars had been
deliberately fought with limitations in order to preserve the broader existing structure.
The frequent response of senior officers of the Cold War era was to blame their own
civil societies and governments, and to seek political support, in a manner reminiscent of the
172

German stab in the back myth after the First World War. The resulting internal political
conflicts produced severe political dislocation at home: not just changes of government but of
constitutions. The protracted insurgency in the colonies of Angola and Mozambique was a
principal cause of the Portuguese Armys coup detat in 1974. The Vietnam War caused
trauma in the United States, and caused the resignation of President Lyndon Johnson (1908-
73, President 1963-69). The war in Afghanistan (1979-89) played an important part in the
decision by Soviet President Mikhail Gorbachev (born 1931, in power 1984-1992) to institute
reforms that led to the Soviet Unions collapse in 1991.

The United States and the Vietnam War

The Vietnam War (1961-1975) was among the longest and most complex wars of the
20th century. Its impact on all aspects of military thought and practice, including
counterinsurgency, was immense. The United States had fought guerrillas before the Second
World War, including campaigns in the Philippines, Cuba, in Nicaragua (1927-33) against
the Sandinistas under Augusto Sandino (1893-1934), and in the Korean War; but
counterinsurgency was never seen as a priority. In 1961, when the first American combat
troops were sent to South Vietnam, orders were issued to expand rapidly and
substantiallythe orientation of existing forces for the conduct of non-nuclear war,
paramilitary operations and sublimited or unconventional wars.
246
Counterinsurgency
became one of the roles of Special Forces.
After a few years of relative peace, by 1961 South Vietnam faced a substantial double
threat from the indigenous village-based guerrillas of the Viet Cong (Vietnamese

246
Quoted in Peter Paret and John W. Shy, Guerrillas in the 1960s (1962).
173

Communists or VC), and the incursions of the conventional if jungle-wise North Vietnamese
Army (NVA).
247
At first the American military response was chiefly advisory, including
Special Forces and a hearts and minds counterinsurgency strategy. In 1962 a strategic
hamlet programme was introduced to create new villages.
The corruption and unpopularity of successive South Vietnam governments made a
political-military counterinsurgency strategy virtually impossible. In 1965 the Americans,
fearing both a major conventional invasion of South Vietnam and also (only two years after
the Cuban missile crisis) a direct confrontation with China or the Soviet Union, moved to a
limited war strategy in Vietnam. Even at this early date, President Lyndon Johnson believed
that the war could probably not be won, but that it must be continued as part of the wider
Cold War deterrence and containment policy. The counterinsurgency approach was never
officially abandoned in Vietnam, and Special Forces achieved success with it, notably with
the Montagnard people of the Vietnam central highlands. Elsewhere, American conscripts
untrained in counterinsurgency and on one-year tours of duty made any hearts and minds
campaign unworkable. One US Army lieutenant who headed a Mobile Assistance Team
(MAT) helping South Vietnamese village forces in 1969 wrote:
Far too many [American soldiers] were harsh with their judgements, obvious in their
contempt, and expressive of their dissatisfaction. Their attitudes were corrosive and
terribly chilling to the ever-spluttering sense of co-operation between the natives and the
American soldiers. As a result, I was often grateful that there were no American units in
my district, or in the entire province for that matter[They] would have wrecked my own
efforts at bringing some sort of peace and calm to my villages.
! David Donovan, Once a Warrior King (1985)
The United States was so powerful compared to North Vietnam that it seemed
inconceivable that it could lose the war. This led to a confused American strategy, with
overlapping chains of command and authority, as different methods and strategies were

247
These were the names given them by their enemies, and adopted by the United States. They called themselves
the National Liberation Front (NFL) and the Peoples Liberation Army (PLA,) respectively.
174

adopted. The fundamental doctrinal problem was that limited war, which depended on the
United States stalemating the war and waiting for the real enemy (meaning the Soviet Union)
to recognise that it could not be won, was opposing the Communists protracted war, the
entire basis of which was outlasting the enemy, together with a fiercely determined
Vietnamese nationalism. The great strength of the Communist system in Vietnam, which had
in 1965 existed for almost 30 years, was the synergy between the NVA and the VC. In the
villages the VC promoted a political strategy of revolutionary land reform together with
guerrilla operations, providing support for NVA units that undertook major battles. But the
NVA and VC knew that they could never defeat the United States, and were shocked by
American firepower and resources, adopting tactical expedients such as extensive
underground tunnel systems (notably in the Iron Triangle north-west of Saigon).
248

By late 1967 the VC had taken heavy losses, and the American government believed it
had won the war. Then came the NVA and VC Tet Offensive in January 1968, the first of a
series of attacks on South Vietnamese towns and cities that lasted until October. Although
the VC were virtually wiped out in these battles, the American government was not prepared
to provide the increased numbers of troops demanded to continue the war. Domestic public
protests against the war and its conduct were increasing, and although a majority of
Americans still supported the war this was not expected to last. President Richard Nixon
(1913-94, in office 1969-74), who was elected in 1968 on a platform of ending the war,
sought to achieve this by three methods. He sought dtente with the Soviet Union and in
1972 recognised Maos China, hoping to deprive North Vietnam of their support. In South
Vietnam he adopted Vietnamisation, providing arms and equipment to South Vietnamese
forces while reducing the American commitment, believing correctly that Americans
objected less to the war than to their own involvement in it. He also sought to end the war by

248
NVA troops were also instructed to fight the Americans by clinging to their belt-buckles, closing the range
in infantry firefights so that American fire support could not be used effectively.
173

escalating it. In 1969 American B-52 heavy bombers attacked the Ho Chi Minh Trail, the
main NVA supply route down the central highlands in neutral Cambodia, followed in 1970
by a brief cross-border invasion of Cambodia itself. A cease-fire with North Vietnam and the
VC was signed in Paris in 1973 and the United States withdrew from the war. Bombing
Cambodia was an act of war that Nixon had sought illegally to conceal, believing that he
could not obtain the necessary political support. The de-stabilisation caused by American
escalation also led in 1975 to the collapse of Cambodia and Laos into anarchy, with their own
Maoist insurgents the Khmer Rouge and the Pathet Lao respectively coming to power.
In Hanoi in 1975, in a famous exchange, US Army Colonel Harry G. Summers told his
North Vietnamese opposite number, You know, you never defeated us on the battlefield,
and received the reply, That may be true, but it is also irrelevant. Whether an American
counterinsurgency strategy alone could have won the Vietnam War is debatable. The
Australian and New Zealand brigade group that fought in South Vietnam achieved
considerable success using British-style counterinsurgency, and Special Forces were equally
successful with the Montagnards but these were isolated cases.
By the early 1980s an American military consensus emerged in keeping with the
changes made to their Limited War doctrine. This argued that, in addition to the flaws in
Limited War itself, the mistake had been attempting a political-military strategy at all: the
United States had won the peoples war in South Vietnam by destroying the VC guerrillas,
and should have treated the entire war as conventional. Summers was a prominent exponent
of this view:
Our error was not that we were fearful of the dangers of nuclear war and of Chinese or
Russian intervention in Vietnam. These were the proper concern of the military strategist.
The error was that we took counsel of these fears and in doing so paralysed our strategic
thinkingThe guerrillas in Vietnam did not achieve decisive results on their own. Even
at the very end there was no popular mass uprising to overthrow the Saigon
government[Rather] they harassed and distracted both the United States and South
176

Vietnam so that North Vietnamese regular forces could reach a decision in conventional
battles.
! Harry G. Summers, On Strategy: A Critical Analysis of the Vietnam War (1982)
This interpretation of Vietnam has been much criticised. One specialist on guerrilla warfare
dismissed Summerss argument as All would have gone well in Vietnam if there had been
no guerrillas and Carl von Clausewitz had been in command.
249
But increasingly the view
that United States armed forces should not engage in counterinsurgency or other forms of
political-military operations restricting themselves to conventional approaches to any
military problem grew to become their orthodoxy.

The Cuban Revolution and the Emergence of Urban Terrorism

An important variant on the Maoist style of insurgency emerged from the Cuban
Revolution (1956-59) and became very influential around the world. Cuba had been annexed
by the United States from Spain in 1898 and made independent, although dominated by
American interests and subject to revolts. In 1953 an attempt to overthrow the islands
dictator Fulgencio Batista failed, and its leader Fidel Castro (born 1927) went into exile,
returning in 1956 to start an insurgency. Although Cuba is the largest island in the
Caribbean, events were on a tiny scale in comparison with Maos China. The Cuban Army
was 30,000 men, and the insurgents before 1959 no more than 2,000 and sometimes fewer
than 20 effectives. But Batistas regime was extremely corrupt and unpopular; riots and
insurrections in the cities, notably the capital Havana, tied down almost half the Cuban Army,
and Castro slowly gained popular support, assisted by the charismatic Argentinean, Ernesto

249
Robert B. Asprey, War in the Shadows (1994).
177

Che Guevara (1928-67). In January 1959 the Batista government collapsed and Castro
captured Havana, proclaiming a Communist republic in Cuba.
Ordinarily, the United States would have intervened militarily. Its initial response was
a covert CIA operation in April 1961, landing an invasion force of anti-Communist Cubans to
topple Castro, an attempt that failed disastrously at the Bay of Pigs on the south of the island.
Castro turned for help to the Soviet Union, which in October 1962 tried to install medium-
range nuclear missiles on Cuba, causing the Cuban missile crisis. As part of the settlement to
end the crisis, the United States undertook neither to invade Cuba nor to topple Castro
(although it tried repeatedly to assassinate him over the next decade). In Central and South
American terms, the Cuban Revolution was an isolated special case, consisting of a very
unstable and incompetent target government and an American refusal to intervene for reasons
of Cold War politics. Castros insurgency owed much to Mao, but the growth in popular
support in its last year was clearly not protracted war. Guevara, together with his associate
the French Marxist philosopher Rgis Debray (born 1941), claimed that Cuba was a model
for a new insurgency method, developed independently from Mao, that was applicable
anywhere on the South American continent. Guevara advanced three main propositions:
Popular forces can win against the Army.
It is not necessary to wait until all conditions for making revolution exist; the insurrection
can create them.
In underdeveloped [Latin] America the countryside is the basic area for armed fighting.
! Che Guevara, Guerrilla Warfare (1961)
The main practical contribution of the Cuban Revolution to insurgency theory was the
foco (focus in Spanish), a small guerrilla group moving around the countryside, keeping
itself in being and carrying out raids. Guevara believed that such groups had generated mass
178

popular support almost spontaneously by their arrival and demonstration of revolutionary
zeal and effectiveness, hence the name. Maos long preparations, constructing secure bases
among the peasant village population, were neither relevant nor necessary. In several South
American countries in the early 1960s small revolutionary foco groups (often fewer than 50
people) tried to repeat the Cuban experience, all without success. Guevara was killed with an
unsuccessful foco in Bolivia in 1967, by the Bolivian army which had received training,
equipment and Special Forces assistance from the United States. The foco concept in practice
produced a return to traditional guerrilla warfare, with insurgents roaming the countryside,
difficult to destroy but not a threat to the state. It was employed particularly in sub-Saharan
Africa by revolutionary groups assisted by Cuban advisors sent by the Soviet Union. Most
sub-Saharan African insurgencies took their basic ideas from Mao and Guevara. In 1968 the
deposed President of Ghana, Kwame Nkrumah (1909-72; in power 1960-66), who advocated
a pan-African insurgency, wrote:
Between a zone [of Africa] under enemy control where the masses are awakening and a
hotly contested zone, there is only one missing link: a handful of genuine revolutionaries
prepared to organise and act. In base areas, it is essential to use the armed forces in
conjunction with the masses in order to defeat the enemyOur liberation struggle must be
based on the immense revolutionary potential of the peasantry.
! Kwame Nkrumah, Handbook of Revolutionary Warfare (1968)
250

The Rhodesian War 1965-79 also showed many characteristics of the Maoist insurgency
style. Although Rhodesian forces inflicted heavy casualties on insurgents both in Rhodesia
itself and in cross-border raids into Mozambique, their long-term political defeat was never
seriously in doubt. In a settlement brokered by Britain in 1979-80, Rhodesia became
Zimbabwe with Robert Mugabe (born 1924) leader of the Zimbabwean Patriotic Front as
president.

250
Nkrumah became the first leader of an independent Ghana in 1957, established a one-party state in 1964, and
was deposed by coup detat in 1966, fleeing to Hanoi. His book was written in exile in Guinea, and he died in
Romania in 1972.
179

Although both Mao and Guevara emphasised rural safe bases, cities had played a
significant part in both the Chinese Civil War and the Cuban Revolution. The 19th century
idea of the cities as the focus of revolution never entirely disappeared. As counterinsurgency
forces and skills developed, it also became much harder for insurgents to establish their rural
base areas. Meanwhile, urbanisation in many developing countries led to the creation of
large inner-city slums. In the 1960s there was a revival of city-based insurgency,
characterised as urban terrorism or the urban guerrilla campaign, directed particularly at
repressive regimes in South America that practised state terrorism. These revolutionary urban
terror campaigns had strong overtones of 19th century anarchism in their emphasis on the
propaganda of the deed, and the small numbers involved. Their political objective was to
provoke the target government into over-reaction, becoming even more repressive; their
related military objective was to tie down police and armed forces (increasingly referred to
collectively as security forces or SF) in a protracted campaign. The underlying ideas of
wearing down the enemy were still largely Maoist, but the context had changed from the
countryside to the city. As expressed by a Venezuelan Communist leader:
In the present conditions, to regard guerrilla warfare in the rural areas as the main form of
revolutionary struggle would be mechanically to transfer an experience which, while
successful in other countries, does not correspond to the peculiarities of national reality.
We proceed from the fact that nearly three-fourths of our population are urbanised, that the
radicalised masses and our main motive forces of the revolution are concentrated in the
townsRevolutionary armed actions [are] therefore mostly in the form of urban
insurrections.

! Juan Rodrguez, The New in the Political Line of the Communist Party of Venezuela,
World Marxist Review, 1967, quoted in William J. Pomeroy (ed.) Guerrilla Warfare
and Marxism (1969)
Urban terror campaigns were mounted throughout South America, notably in
Venezuela, by the Tupermaros in Uruguay, and in Brazil under the most famous of the urban
180

terrorism theorists Carlos Marighela (1911-69), whose posthumous Mini-Manual of the
Urban Guerrilla enjoyed wide international circulation. In this short book, Marighela
advocated firing groups of five or fewer as the basic urban guerrilla unit. De-centralised
organisation and mobility within the city were critical to avoiding detection, identification
and capture by the security forces:
From the moment a large proportion of the people begin to take his activities seriously, his
success is assured. The government can only intensify its repression, thus making the life
of its citizens harder than ever: homes will be broken into, police searches organised,
innocent people arrested, and communications broken; police terror will become the order
of the day, and there will be more and more political murders in short, a massive
political persecution.
! Carlos Marighela, The Mini-Manual of the Urban Guerrilla (1969), quoted in Walter
Laqueur, Guerrilla: A Historical and Critical Study (1977).
This urban tactical battle would prepare the way for a campaign in the countryside as
the area of strategic decision.

Other theorists and urban guerrilla groups maintained the
anarchist belief that a terror campaign could itself bring about a revolution. As Abraham
Guillen in Uruguay expressed it:
The urban guerrilla will have to remain, like a fish in water, within a favourable urban
milieu. And in order to endure he will have to change his domicile constantly, never
settling in a given place. In a large city where there are a hundred guerrilla cells of five
persons living separately and fighting together, the police will be unable to control
matters; they will have to cede terrain, especially at night, in unfavourable population
zones where no police dare appear separately or in small groups. If at night the city
belongs to the guerrilla and, in part, to the police by day, then in the end the war will be
won by whoever endures longest.
! Quoted in Conor Gearty, Terror (1991)
Guillens adaptation of Maos ideas and phrases to urban terrorism is evident. He considered
that the Tupermaros failed in Uruguay through being over-centralised, becoming static and
vulnerable to identification.
181

These South American urban terror campaigns largely succeeded in provoking state
over-reaction and counter-terror. Typically, Brazilian government death squads killed at least
1,000 people between 1964 and 1970. But none of the insurgent groups won political power.
Instead, largely with support from the United States, most South American governments
moved back towards democracy in the 1980s. The commitment to terrorism meant that the
guerrillas could never win the popular support they needed. They could not win militarily,
nor unlike rural guerrillas who could make some claim to recognition as legitimate soldiers
could they make a credible transition to political respectability. The 1960s also marked the
start of globalisation. Business and finance became increasingly multinational, and so did
organised crime, profiting particularly from an expanding international drug trade that was
also used to finance many insurgencies. International and intercontinental travel became
more common, particularly by commercial jet aircraft. Changes in media technology and the
rise of television also made news more international. One consequence was the emergence of
something close to the old anarchist dream of a true global revolutionary movement, aided
once more by a new generation of explosives and small automatic weapons that provided
increased firepower.
This form of terrorism had links with revolutionary and insurgent groups, but chiefly
consisted of very small cliques of anarchists (although few used the old title) carrying out
murders, kidnapping and planting bombs. They included the romantically named
Weathermen, Black Panthers and Symbionese Liberation Army in the United States, and the
Red Brigades in Italy and Japan. The most famous, the Baader-Meinhof Gang (the Red
Army Faction or RAF) that terrorised West Germany in the 1970s, believed that its attacks
would provoke a reaction in the form of a neo-Nazi government, and that the ensuing protests
would bring about a Communist revolution. This form of terrorism contributed to a general
climate of concern, but never posed a serious threat to any democratic governments survival.
182

Other terrorist groups had neo-Fascist or radical right-wing ideologies, particularly in Italy
and South and Central America. In the context of the Cold War these were seen as less of a
threat.
A further form of terrorism to emerge in the same period was international terrorism
traditional guerrilla warfare adapted to the new global environment. The most marked case
of this form of terrorism came from the Middle East. In 1957 the Movement for the
Liberation of Palestine or al-Fatah was formed, with among its leaders Yasser Arafat
(Mohammed Abed Arouf Arafat al-Husseini, 1929-2004), leading in 1964 to the creation of
the Palestine Liberation Organisation (PLO). Israels crushing victory in the Six Day War of
1967 left guerrilla warfare as the PLOs only viable strategy. Resembling a semi-
conventional army made up of competing factions rather than a traditional guerrilla group,
the PLO and its associates mounted almost 4,000 raids into Israel from Jordan in 1969.
Another part of the Palestinian guerrilla strategy was an international campaign of terror,
including hijacking commercial aircraft for publicity purposes. In the tradition of the
propaganda of the deed, George Habash, leader of the Popular Front for the Liberation of
Palestine (PFLP), declared:
When we hijack a plane, it has more effect than if we killed a hundred Israelis in battle.
For decades world opinion has been neither for nor against the Palestinians. It simply
ignored us. At least the world is talking about us now.

! Quoted in Conor Gearty, Terror (1991)
In the Munich Massacre, Palestinian terrorists took hostage some Israeli athletes at the
1972 Olympic Games, and died with them in a failed West German rescue attempt. This type
of hijack or hostage-taking was widely adopted in the 1970s. Separatists from South
Molucca (part of Indonesia) sought publicity by capturing targets such as a school and a train
in the Netherlands. Special techniques including military action also evolved in response. In
183

1976, after a commercial aircraft containing Israelis was hijacked to Entebbe airport in
Uganda, Israeli commandos carried out a spectacular rescue. In 1980 the Iranian Embassy in
London was seized by Iranian separatists, leading to its being stormed by the SAS.
Although this form of international terrorism was sometimes a military concern, it was
not insurgency in the sense that there was no real threat to the stability of the target country.
Rather, terrorism was a way of placing a grievance on the political agenda, of fighting the
enemy by the only means available, and of seeking to exert long-term influence. The PLO
was not going to cause the downfall of Israel by these methods. Forcibly expelled from
Jordan in 1970, it moved increasingly towards political methods and was recognised by the
United Nations in 1974. Resettling in the increasingly failed state of Lebanon, it resumed
guerrilla raids until forcibly expelled again by an Israeli invasion in 1982. When a grassroots
Palestinian insurgency, the intifada, emerged in 1987, the PLO was sought out by the Israelis
as a useful leader for bringing the Palestinians under control, becoming the Palestinian
Authority in 1993.
In British Armed Forces doctrine, responses to international terrorism fall within
Military Aid to the Civil Power (MACP). Although terrorist organisations often form links
with each other, the doctrinal division between urban terrorism as a tactic within insurgency
and terrorism as anarchism or guerrilla warfare has been valuable in helping military planners
conceptualise their operations and responses. Some theorists, notably the British specialist
Conor Gearty in the 1990s, have argued that terror is a tactic that may be employed for
almost any motive, rather than grouping all terrorists and their activities together. In this
context, the War Against Terror declared by the Americans after 9/11 is meant to make the
tactic of terrorism too costly to employ, rather than to oppose the aims of groups which use
the tactic.
184

British Counterinsurgency

During the retreat from empire, British troops were involved in continual military
operations, most of them counterinsurgency campaigns. The British developed a distinctive
counterinsurgency style based on minimum military commitment, civilian primacy, and a
hearts and minds approach that was much admired and copied. Demands on the British
economy after the Second World War meant that minimum force was the only realistic
option. Much of British counterinsurgency evolved from the older imperial policing role,
particularly civilian primacy and the role of local intelligence and paramilitary forces
(including colonial police forces). The British also had an immense political advantage in
colonial counterinsurgency: their policy of withdrawing peacefully from Empire, made
credible by granting independence to India in 1947, making it hard for insurgents to gain
popular support as nationalists fighting to expel British colonial rulers. It also gave
successive British governments great latitude in deciding where to fight and which wars
could be won. No government committed British forces to an unwinnable war for the sake of
prestige, and there were no major political traumas in Britain.
251

The unsuccessful British counterinsurgency in Palestine 1944-47 was the last use of the
older British coercive imperial policing style, against Zionist insurgents who used various
methods including urban terrorism.
252
The next British counterinsurgency, the Malayan
Emergency 1948-60, was important as the first defeat for the Maoist insurgency style.
Malaya became part of the British Empire in the early 19th century, consisting of several
states each with its own native ruler, plus the important port and naval base of Singapore.
Other than the Malay population there was a large minority of Straits Chinese, originally

251
The single British exception was the 1956 Suez expedition, which caused the resignation of Prime Minister
Anthony Eden and left a political trauma that took years to disappear; but this was not a counterinsurgency.
252
One of the ironies of Israels war against Arab terrorists has been that some senior Israeli politicians had
themselves practised terrorism against the British.
183

immigrant workers, and other smaller minorities. In 1942 the Japanese over-ran the
peninsula, capturing Singapore, and the Allies organised a guerrilla resistance movement for
the duration of the Second World War. In 1945 its leader, Chin Peng (probably born 1921)
was awarded the OBE. In 1948 the British created the Malayan Federation as a prelude to
independence, and the Malayan Communists under Chin Peng responded with an insurgency,
encouraged by Maos own victory. Mainly Straits Chinese, the Communist Terrorists
(CTs) as the British called them,
253
had their power base among the squatter villages,
technically illegal dwellings that housed Chinese tin and rubber workers close to the jungle
edge.
For the first two years, the British were on the defensive as CTs carried out attacks on
plantations and mines, and planted bombs in cities. But many factors worked to the British
advantage: they had a credible political platform; there was a marked ethnic and religious
split between the mainly Chinese CTs and the majority of Malays; there was a post-war
economic boom, particularly in demand for rubber and tin, which helped fund the
counterinsurgency effort. The British also controlled the sea and the air; Malaya was a
relatively small peninsula; and Thailand to the north was hostile to the CTs, who had no
political safe base area. The CTs also alienated many people by indiscriminate violence not
supported by political indoctrination.
Particularly after the Korean War began in 1950, Britain could not afford a large
military commitment to Malaya. Its counterinsurgency strategy was formulated first by
Lieutenant General Sir Harold Briggs (1895-1951) in consultation with civil servant, Robert
Thompson (later Sir Robert 1916-92), and implemented by General Sir Gerald Templer (later
Field Marshal 1898-1979) as High Commissioner, 1952-54. The Briggs Plan was a co-

253
Their own name changed from The Malayan Peoples Anti-Japanese Army in the Second World War to The
Malayan Peoples Anti-British Army, and then to The Malayan Peoples Liberation Army.
186

ordinated political-military response aimed at defeating subversion within the cities first,
particularly by reform of the police. Land grants and other measures made it possible to
move the squatter population to new model villages, isolating the insurgents, who were
tracked down in the jungle by deep penetration forces. Templer, who popularised the phrase
this is a war for the hearts and minds of the Malayan people, wrote in November 1952 that
The shooting side of the business is only 25 per cent of the trouble and the other 75 per cent
is getting the people of the country behind us.
254
By 1955 the CTs were on the defensive,
two years later Malaya was given independence, and in 1960 the insurgency was declared
over. As so often, there were unresolved issues. In 1963 Malaya became part of the
Malaysian Federation, but Singapore left to become independent in 1965. Disputes between
Malaysia and Indonesia produced the Borneo Confrontation between 1963 and 1966. The
last few Malayan CTs only surrendered in 1989.
Success in Malaya greatly enhanced the British reputation for counterinsurgency. In
1961-65 Robert Thompson headed a British advisory mission to United States forces in South
Vietnam. In a book, Defeating Communist Insurgency, written in 1965 comparing Vietnam
with Malaya, he outlined some basic principles of counterinsurgency. Each of these took
several pages, but reduced to headings they were:
The government under threat must have a clear political aim.
It must function within the law.
It must have a co-ordinated plan between civil and military authorities.
It must give priority to defeating political subversion.
It must secure its own base area before mounting campaigns into the interior.

254
Quoted in John Cloake, Templer: Tiger of Malaya (1985)
187

The Thompson Principles became famous, and the basis for British counterinsurgency
doctrine for the decolonisation era. Malaya also popularised the model villages approach,
copied by the strategic hamlets in South Vietnam. The British themselves were often
sceptical of the practice, recognising that separating the population from the insurgents was
critical, but arguing that in many cases resettlement was not the best option. Thompsons
principles also did not mention information and intelligence, which were at the core of British
counterinsurgency, probably because they were so fundamental that he took them for granted.
A significantly different kind of insurgency began in Northern Ireland in 1969, almost
the only case of broad-based protracted insurgency in Western Europe (although the Basque
ETA separatist movement began in 1966 but which declared a ceasefire in 2010).
Violence first broke out in 1965 with terrorist attacks on Catholics by the re-formed Ulster
Volunteer Force. In 1969 the Army was deployed to keep order and at first to protect the
Catholics.
255
The IRA, which had mounted spasmodic campaigns since 1923, including a
number of cross-border raids into Ulster from 195 to 1962, saw these disturbances as an
opportunity. Members of the government of Eire (although not the government itself)
supplied funds and arms to the IRA, providing a safe base area across the border, and
seriously considered armed intervention by the Irish Army. In 1970 the IRA split between
the Official IRA (OIRA) which declared a cease-fire in 1972, and the more militant
Provisional IRA (PIRA), which began armed attacks on the security forces, killing its first
British soldier in 1971.
The first years of the Troubles closely resembled an insurgency as envisaged by
Marighela, with a PIRA campaign of shootings and bombing, including the innovation of the

255
Strictly speaking, the British Army was not sent to Northern Ireland, in which there had been a British
garrison for centuries; but it was substantially reinforced.
188

car bomb. Reportedly, PIRA strategy was described in briefing documents given to its new
recruits as:
A war of attrition aimed at maximising casualties among British troops so as to create
a demand from the British public for their withdrawal.
A bombing campaign aimed at damaging British financial interests and long-term
investment in Northern Ireland.
Making Northern Ireland ungovernable except by military colonial rule.
Sustaining the war by national and international propaganda and publicity campaigns.
Defending the war of liberation by punishing criminals, collaborators and informers.
! The PIRA Green Book cited in Thomas Hennessy, A History of Northern Ireland
1920-96 (1997)
By 1970 both Belfast and Londonderry had barricaded Catholic no go areas in which
government authority did not run. As the insurgency developed, guerrilla attacks also took
place in the bandit country of south Armagh, close to the Eire border. The government of
Northern Ireland was successfully provoked into over-reaction. In August 1971 it introduced
internment without trial. This was an often-used tactic in counterinsurgency, bending the
law, but in this case all the internees were Catholics. In January 1972, in an episode that
remains controversial, British soldiers in Londonderry shot dead 13 people at a demonstration
on Bloody Sunday. In July the British government held secret talks with the PIRA
leadership to negotiate a settlement. After these first negotiations failed, the British gradually
regained the initiative. Later in 1972 they launched Operation Motorman to reclaim the no-
go areas, closed down the Northern Ireland parliament, and began reforms of the Royal Ulster
Constabulary (RUC). By 1974 the PIRA was forced to abandon its existing broad-based
structure, replacing it with small active service units similar to the Marighelan firing
189

groups. By then, although the PIRA retained considerable popular support, they were on the
defensive. Deaths from the insurgency dropped off dramatically from 467 in 1972 to 215 in
1974, and continued to decline. The Armys role increasingly resembled MACP rather than
counterinsurgency. Indeed, given the PIRA strategy, the ability to restore police primacy
with a reformed RUC was a critical step towards restoring peace.
In 1981 the PIRA announced a shift to a more political approach, with the Armalite in
one hand and the ballot box in the other.
256
The phrase draws on Yasser Arafats speech to
the UN in which he said, I come bearing an olive branch and a machine gun. Do not let the
olive branch fall from my hand. In 1985 the Anglo-Irish Agreement considerably reduced
the availability of Eire as a safe base area. In 1994 the PIRA declared a ceasefire which
virtually ended the insurgency, followed by a second and apparently lasting ceasefire in 1997.
In the course of the Troubles the British Army had killed 318 people and lost 511 dead itself.
Total deaths in the Troubles (1969-97) reached just under 3,600 of which just over half
occurred in the period 1971 to 1973.
One difference between Northern Ireland and British colonial counterinsurgency was
that the British could not make a credible offer of withdrawal and independence, and in 1972
the PIRA mindful of the consequences of the 1922 partition would settle for nothing less.
The world economic recession of the 1970s, and political and financial support for the PIRA
from sympathisers within the United States, were further factors operating against the British.
Frank Kitson, who commanded a brigade in Belfast in 1970, identified another critical
difference:
In previous campaigns, neutralising insurgents could usually be achieved if the security
forces could find them. [Intelligence gathering] was based on the assumption that if

256
This was PIRA policy from the late 1970s, but the phrase was first used at a Sinn Fein press conference in
1981. Armalite is the commercial name for the Colt M-16 rifle, the standard personal weapon of the US Armed
Forces, also widely used throughout the world.
190

found, insurgents could be engaged in battle legally, or captured and convicted in court, or
detained under emergency legislation. The situation that faced the army in Northern
Ireland was that the law only permitted soldiers to open fire in very restricted
circumstances and court convictions were, and still are, hard to get.

! Sir Frank Kitson, Low Intensity Operations (revised 2010 edition)
The basis of Kitsons own theories of counterinsurgency, and of much British practice,
was information gathered by the troops and by intelligence organisations. Once again,
methods that had worked in a colonial context were inappropriate for the later 20
th
century
British Isles. Michael Dewar, a British Army veteran of the conflict, wrote:
In the early days, until about 1972, the Army over-reacted to the success of the crude IRA
propaganda of the 1970-71 periodThe Army took a while to learn that Ulster was a very
different proposition from the colonial campaigns of the post-war period, which were
sufficiently far removed from home for the Press to be relatively disinterested or easily
misled. In Ulster, scores of highly competent journalists were able to see everything at
first hand.

! Michael Dewar, The British Army in Northern Ireland (revised 1997 edition)
The most successful insurgency movement in modern European history against the worlds
most skilful and experienced counterinsurgency forces was always likely to be a hard and
protracted conflict. It is nevertheless remarkable that the insurgency lasted until 1997,
making it Britains longest war of modern times.
A further important development in British counterinsurgency was the establishment of
doctrine for post-colonial operations. This was based in particular on the Dhofar War 1970-
75, fought in south-western Oman. After a brief counterinsurgency campaign against Arab
nationalists (1962-67), the British abandoned the strategically important port of Aden at the
southern end of the Red Sea, which in 1970 became the capital of the Peoples Democratic
Republic of Yemen (South Yemen), a Communist state supported by the Soviet Union. A
minor separatist rebellion also began in the neighbouring province of Dhofar in Oman in
191

1962. After 1970 the insurgents obtained support from South Yemen to become much better
organised, and appeared close to success.
257
In Cold War politics this was regarded as part of
a Soviet strategy to expand its influence in the Middle East. Neighbouring countries were
also concerned at the Communist threat to their own stability. In 1970 Sultan Qaboos bin
Said (born 1940) came to power in Oman in a virtually bloodless coup, and requested British
intervention. The British sent small specialist military units to Dhofar, including a British
Army Training Team (BATT) of SAS. They also used diplomacy to encourage expansion
and reform of the Sultans Armed Forces (SAF), and troop contributions from Jordan and the
Shahs Iran.
258
Social development in Dhofar was aided by SAS Civil Action Teams
(CAT), while an accompanying military campaign, including the building of a succession of
defensive barriers, pushed the insurgents back into the PDRY. In late 1975 the insurgency
was declared over. In 1990 the PDRY ceased to be Communist, joining the Yemen Arab
Republic to form the modern state of Yemen.
In the decade after 1975, Dr John Pimlott (1948-97, Head of the Department of War
Studies, 1993-97) devised a set of counterinsurgency principles based in particular on the
Dhofar campaign that encapsulate the British style and experience since Malaya:
Recognition of the political nature of the problem
Establishment of a civil-military command and control structure with civilian
supremacy
The importance of information and intelligence

257
Oman was never part of the British Empire, but had close links with the British going back almost two
centuries. In 1970 the countrys name was officially changed from the Sultanate of Muscat and Oman to the
Sultanate of Oman.
258
Until the 1979 revolution Iran was ruled by Muhammad Reza Shah Pahlavi (1919-80, in power 1941-79),
whose rule was seen as a cornerstone of Western defence policy in the region.
192

Splitting the insurgents from the people through the use of propaganda and winning
hearts and minds
Destroying the isolated insurgents; and
Political reforms to prevent re-occurrence
! Based on Ian F.W. Beckett and John Pimlott (eds), Armed Forces and Modern
Counter-Insurgency (1988)
The Pimlott Principles of counterinsurgency were officially adopted as British Army
doctrine in 1996, having been absorbed and practised by the Army for much longer. Unlike
Thompsons principles they were intended to be prescriptive and sequential a checklist of
activities to follow from the start to the finish of the counterinsurgency. They continued to
exercise considerable influence on all aspects of British COIN doctrine but have since been
subsumed by the ten principles now contained in Army Field Manual Countering Insurgency
(2012).
Insurgency and Counterinsurgency since Vietnam

Central America
The pure Maoist style of insurgency based on protracted war and rural settings has
become rare since 1975, mainly because fewer countries fulfil its criteria. Despite American
concerns about there being no effective counterstrategy, it has been defeated by governments
and security forces which, lacking the resources of the United States, have emphasised local
political and social factors. Even so, these have been very long wars. They include the
Maoist insurgencies in Thailand 1965-1983; in the Philippines 1968-1993; and the Tamil
Tigers (Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam) insurgency in Sri Lanka, which started in 1983,
became much closer to conventional war by 1991, and ended in 2009. In all cases, political
193

reforms satisfying a previously dissident mass of the people played a much greater part than
military defeat of the insurgents. Insurgency in this form may be a way of changing
intolerant governments; and like the coup detat its results may be politically beneficial.
However, such cases are the exception.
Among the Maoist insurgencies that still continue is the Shining Path (Sendero
Luminoso) movement in Peru,
259
which began a protracted war in 1980 under Abimael
Guzman (Chairman Gonzalo born 1934). Like Guevara before him, Guzman claimed to
have found a new method of insurgency superior to Maos, based particularly on the cultural
conditions of Peru. But his basic concept of developing a strong political base among the
peasantry, controlling the countryside, and outlasting the enemy remains the same. From
about 1986 Guzman began to modify this Maoist approach and to join other groups in a terror
campaign in the cities, complicated by a large illegal drug trade. Guzman was captured in
1992, and the insurgency has since declined significantly. Another overtly Maoist insurgency
was waged from 1996 to 2006 in Nepal, which suffers considerable problems, especially high
levels of poverty.
By the 1980s insurgency was more likely to take the form of linked campaigns in the
cities and the countryside, mixing terrorism, guerrilla war and subversion. This was well
illustrated by the two largest insurgencies in Central America, the Nicaraguan Civil War
1979-88 and the war in El Salvador 1980-94. In Nicaragua, revolts against the right-wing
Somoza family dictatorship began in 1961, led by the Sandanista Liberation Front (FSLN or
Sandanistas). Under Anastasio Somoza Debayle (1925-80, president 1974-79) repressive
policies including the use of death squads vastly increased support for the Sandanistas, who
seized power in 1979 after a guerrilla campaign, establishing what became a Cuba-like

259
The full title of the movement is: The Communist Party of Peru by the Shining Path of Jos Carlos Mariategui
and Marxism, Leninism, Maoism and the Thoughts of Chairman Gonzalo.
194

Communist government with Soviet support. The United States under President Ronald
Reagan (1911-2004; in office 1981-88) responded by providing financial and military support
for an army of pro-Somoza guerrillas and mercenaries, the Contras, against the Sandanistas.
The resulting war more closely resembled a mixture of terrorism and guerrilla war practised
by conventional armies than true insurgency. American political and popular opinion was
also deeply divided over its involvement in Nicaragua.
260
In 1990 the war ended as part of the
wider Cold War settlement; in supervised elections the Sandanistas were voted from office,
and the Contras disarmed.
In Nicaragua the United States supported the insurgents against the government; at the
same time in neighbouring El Salvador from 1980 to 1994 it supported the government
against the insurgents. Communist-led revolts in El Salvador date back to 1932. In 1979 a
coup imposed yet another in a succession of quasi-military governments, backed by right-
wing death squads. An organised insurgency movement, the Farabundo Mart National
Liberation Front (FMLF) began an urban campaign in retaliation, obtaining support from
Cuba and the Soviet Union, and increasingly establishing rural bases. In response, the United
States provided support to a succession of El Salvadorean governments. The result was a
long and bitter guerrilla war with neither side able to achieve victory, and which again
provoked political controversy in the United States. This insurgency was also defused by
external political pressure at the end of the Cold War, with the imposition of a United Nations
monitoring and peacekeeping force to oversee elections in 1993-94. The experience of
Nicaragua and El Salvador reinforced American preferences for conventional war over
counterinsurgency.

260
To fund its support of the Contras, in 1986 the Reagan government sold arms to revolutionary Iran for the
Iran-Iraq War (1980-88), in violation of American law. The Iran-Contra scandal broke after Reagan retired
from office in 1988.
193

The Soviets in Afghanistan, 1979-89
Its significance often overlooked, the SovietAfghan War stands as one of the seminal
events of the last quarter of the 20th century. In less than a decade it exposed fatal defects in
the Soviet political structure as well as in communist ideology itself, helped trigger and
sustain the policy of internal reform led by Mikhail Gorbachev from 1985, contributed
strongly to the collapse of the communist party and the consequent end to the Cold War and,
finally, played a decisive contributing role in the disintegration of the USSR. The conflict
rapidly involved other nations with strong political interests at stake in Central Asia, not least
the United States, which clandestinely siphoned billions of dollars in aid to the mujahideen
through Pakistan. Pakistan itself not only strongly supported the resistance in general, but
particularly those factions of religious extremists who in the wake of Soviet withdrawal took
a prominent part in the internecine struggle between rival mujahideen factions that ultimately
led to the Talibans triumph in the autumn of 1996. In short, the network that became al-
Qaeda took root as a direct consequence of the SovietAfghan War, in which Osama bin
Laden and others like him provided substantial funds to large numbers of jihadi.
The international implications soon became apparent. Quite apart from the horrific
wave of repression which their regime unleashed, the Taliban offered Afghanistan as a
training and recruiting ground for other extremist groups whose political and ideological
agenda stretched far beyond the borders of their war-ravaged country. By hosting al-Qaeda
on Afghan soil, the Taliban sowed the seeds for the terrorist attacks of 11 September 2001,
which in turn triggered a devastating reaction from the United States and the United
Kingdom, soon followed by other NATO powers. All of this Pandoras box may be traced
to the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan and the ghastly war it inaugurated.
196

The foundations of a full understanding of the Wests involvement in Afghanistan
today must rest upon a firm grasp of the causes, course and outcome of the SovietAfghan
War, the lessons from which confirmed the folly that underpinned Soviet strategy: the pursuit
of unrealistic political aims with armed forces unable to cope with the unconventional
methods of an adversary which, though vastly disadvantaged in weapons and technology,
managed to overcome the odds through sheer tenacity and an unswerving devotion to
freedom and faith.
In 1979, political leaders in Moscow directed a sceptical military to intervene in the
Afghan civil war in order to maintain in power in Kabul a nominally communist regime,
which was struggling against a resistance movement of disparate groups known collectively
as the mujahideen or fighters for the faith. Deeply unpopular with large swathes of rural,
deeply conservative, tribal peoples stretched across a country divided on religious, ethnic and
tribal lines, Nur Mohammed Tarakis government of the Democratic Republic of Afghanistan
(DRA) controlled the urban areas but very little of the countryside, where tribal elders and
clan chiefs held sway. Even within the communist party apparatus, rival factions grappled for
sole control of the affairs of state, denying them the time and ability to implement the
socialist reforms they espoused, including the emancipation of women, land redistribution
and the dismantling of traditional societal structures in favour of a more egalitarian
alternative. None of these reforms resonated with a traditional, Islamic nation, whose
opposition manifested its outrage in open civil war. Taraki was overthrown by his own prime
minister, Hafizullah Amin, a member of the opposing communist faction; yet Amin proved
even less effective at imposing rule than his predecessor. Lack of political direction and anger
at unwanted reforms precipitated mutinies and mass desertions within the army and outbreaks
of bloody revolt in villages, towns and cities across the country, which the Soviets
197

immediately appreciated as a threat to their influence over a neighbouring state sharing a
border with three of the USSRs Muslim republics.
Leonid Brezhnev, General Secretary of the Communist Party of the Soviet Union,
concerned at the disintegrating situation in Afghanistan and determined to maintain a sphere
of influence over the region, ordered an invasion. As neither the climate nor the terrain suited
Soviet equipment or tactics, the sheer size of the endeavour became daunting. When Soviet
troops rolled over the border in December 1979, ostensibly in aid of a surrogate government
in Kabul, they expected to conduct a brief, largely bloodless campaign with highly
sophisticated mechanized and air assault forces, easily capable of crushing Afghan resistance
in a matter of months before enabling a newly installed government to tackle the resistance
thereafter. Events exploded at least two myths prevalent in the West: the Soviets never
intended to remain long in Afghanistan, as supposed in Washington, and their relatively small
troop numbers attested to this fact. Nor did the invasion represent the belated realisation of
the historic Russian drive to establish a warm-water port on the Indian Ocean. Theirs was to
constitute a temporary albeit an internationally condemned presence.
Yet the Soviets comprehensively failed to appreciate the quagmire in which they found
themselves. Their forces possessed very limited combat experience none at all in
counterinsurgency and they foolishly assumed their successful interventions in East
Germany in 1954, in Hungary in 1956 and in Czechoslovakia in 1968 offered models for any
military operation executed against a popular struggle. Western analysts, too, predicted
Soviet victory, but the political and military circumstances behind the Iron Curtain offered no
parallels with Afghanistan. Unlike the Soviets client states in Eastern Europe, Afghanistan
stood embroiled in the midst of a civil war not a simple, effectively unarmed, insurrection
and thus applying simple, albeit overwhelming, military might could only guarantee
protection for the central government in Kabul and perhaps control of larger cities and towns,
198

but not the countryside. Soviet intervention in December 1979 achieved its initial objective
with predictable ease: elite troops overthrew the government, seized the presidential palace
and key communications centres, killed Amin and replaced him with a Soviet-sponsored
successor, Babrak Karmal.
The plan thereafter seemed straightforward: stabilize the political situation, strengthen,
re-train and enlarge DRA forces to enable them to quell the insurgency on their own, while
concurrently performing the more passive roles of garrison duty and protecting the countrys
key infrastructure such as major roads, dams and its sources of electricity and gas. Thus,
within three years, the Soviets, confident in the notion that the Afghan government could
stand on its own feet when armed with the continued presence of Soviet advisors including
army officers, KGB personnel, civilian specialists in engineering, medicine, education and
other spheres, and furnished with a continuous supply of arms and technology, believed their
forces could withdraw across the border, leaving a friendly, stable, compliant and
ideologically like-minded regime firmly in power behind them.
None of these objectives stood up to the reality of the situation, however. The civil war
continued to spiral beyond the governments ability to suppress it and the DRA forces
morale plummeted further, decreasing their operational effectiveness and worrying Moscow
that withdrawing its troops would amount to both humiliation and the collapse of all Soviet
influence over its client state. Thus, what began as a fairly simple military operation
overthrowing a government and occupying key positions throughout the country, a task
which the Soviet military, trained in large-scale, high-tempo operations could manage with
ease soon developed into a protracted, costly and ultimately unwinnable fiasco. The conflict
pitted small, ill-armed but highly motivated guerrillas employing fighting methods bearing
no relation to those practised by opponents trained and armed to fight in central Europe
against forces of utterly different organisation and doctrine. Experience soon demonstrated
199

the limited efficacy of heavy infantry, tanks, artillery, and jet fighters in a struggle that
decisively depended upon more helicopter gunships, more heliborne troops, and more special
forces to meet the demands of the fluid, asymmetric war conducted by the mujahideen.
As the years passed and Soviet casualties steadily mounted totalling about 15,000
dead and over 10,000 invalids, not to mention the vast numbers of other categories of
wounded personnel the war graphically exposed the weaknesses of Moscows strategy and
the poorly suited structure of their armed forces, which never succeeded in overcoming an
ever-growing resistance movement operating over a vast, varied and exceedingly challenging
landscape. Indeed, both Soviet tactics and strategy contained fatal flaws. Their doctrine
directed the use of armoured and motor rifle units to advance along narrow axes, maintaining
secure lines of communication while wreaking destruction upon any resistance they
encountered through combined arms (the coordination of firepower offered by infantry,
armour and air assault units). With little experience or training in a counterinsurgency role,
Soviet forces chose a simplistic approach to the problem: simply clearing territory in their
path, which translated into the widespread killing of civilians as well as resistance fighters,
who avoided where possible the superior weight of fire which their opponents could bring to
bear. Everywhere circumstances appeared to confirm Alexander the Greats dictum that one
can occupy Afghanistan, but one cannot vanquish her.
Civilians who survived the onslaught naturally fled, embittered, abandoning their
destroyed villages and property to seek refuge in cities or over the border. Such ruthless
exploitation of air and artillery power was deliberately meant to clear areas, particularly along
the border with Pakistan, so as to deprive the resistance of recruits and local support as well
as to aid in the interdiction of supplies crossing over into Afghanistan. This strategy resulted
in horrendous human suffering. Statistics vary on the unnatural, war-related Afghan deaths
that occurred during the war, but range between 900,000 and 1.3 million people. What
200

proportion of this number may be identified as mujahideen is impossible to discern, but their
losses must have numbered in the many tens of thousands. Yet this already staggering scale
of combined military and civilian fatalities must not obscure the record of suffering caused to
ordinary villagers through injury and disability. An estimated 1.5 million Afghan civilians
became physically disabled as a result of the war.
At the outset of the war the Soviets strategy involved persuading the population to
support the communist-led Kabul government, thus denying the resistance of aid within the
anonymity of the provinces. This soon proved unrealistic, not least owing to the regimes
heavy-handed measures. They then turned to denying the insurgents supplies, which led to
driving civilians off their land or destroying their livelihoods as a warning to withhold their
support from the insurgency. This also involved interdicting supply routes that connected the
insurgents to the vital matriel moving through Pakistan, the principal source of aid to the
mujahideen. The Soviet 40th Army mounted numerous substantial operations against areas
known to be actively supporting the resistance and severed supply lines whenever possible,
but the drip, drip effect caused by the guerrillas constant ambushes, sniping, raids and
mine-laying ultimately inflicted unsustainable losses on the invader.
The SovietAfghan War differed from other conflicts of the Cold War era. Although it
was a limited conflict, it was longer than most slightly over nine years in length and thus
did not share the decisive nature of the ArabIsraeli wars of 1948, 1956, 1967 and 1973, or
the Falklands War of 1982. The Soviet imbroglio lacked the scale of either the Korean War
(1950-53) or Vietnam (1965-73) and did not conclude with a clear political outcome, in
contrast to those proxy conflicts. Nor can it be seen as some sort of Soviet Vietnam,
especially in terms of scale. The Soviets never deployed anything approaching the numbers
the Americans sent to South East Asia, with over half a million personnel by 1968, compared
with the average of approximately 118,000 Soviets serving at any given time in Afghanistan.
201

Whereas the Americans conducted numerous operations involving several divisions, the
Soviets entire 40th Army in Afghanistan consisted of a mere five divisions, four independent
brigades and four independent regiments, plus various small support units. Numbers as
insufficient as these denied the Soviets by their own faulty strategic calculations any
realistic chance of securing over 20 provincial centres plus various key industrial sites, to say
nothing of the manpower required to control whole swathes of remote and practically
inaccessible territory inhabited by a seething population supporting elusive, seldom visible,
opponents who moved by stealth, struck at will, and melted back into civilian life with little
or no trace. The protection required for hundreds of miles of roads, communication lines, and
points of strategic importance some of which the Soviets had to occupy outright or, at the
very least, deny to the mujahideen placed a colossal burden on the invaders, who failed to
appreciate both the sheer scale of the enterprise and the immense commitment in manpower it
required. In short, the Soviets failed to deploy sufficient numbers of forces to fulfil their
mission and could not possibly hope to defeat the insurgency when spread across such a vast
area. The defence of bases, airfields, cities and lines of communication alone committed the
bulk of Soviet forces to static duties when circumstances demanded unremitting strike
operations against the insurgents, thereby maintaining the initiative and obliging the
resistance to look to their own survival in favour of attacks of their own.
An analysis of the operational record of the conflict reveals that the Soviets completely
failed to accept that their doctrine and training ill-suited them for the type of war into which
they plunged themselves. Fully capable of undertaking operations on a grand scale and in a
conventional context, apart from their special forces Soviet troops were not armed, equipped
or trained for a platoon leaders war that entailed locating and destroying small, elusive, local
forces that only stood their ground and fought when terrain and circumstances favoured them,
and otherwise struck quickly before rapidly melting away. There were no fixed positions, no
202

established front lines and rarely any substantial bases of operation for the insurgents.
Whereas the Soviets could perform extremely well at the operational level, complete with
large-scale all-arms troop movements, these could not be easily adapted to circumstances on
the ground where the fighting occurred on a small scale and amidst circumstances in which
Soviet tactics did not conform to the requirements of guerrilla warfare. Soviet equipment,
weapons and doctrine suited their forces well for a confrontation on a massive scale on the
northern European plain, a context in which they were confident in employing massed
artillery to obliterate NATOs defensive positions before driving through the gaps created to
crush further resistance and to pursue the remnants of shattered units.
Soviet tactics in Afghanistan by contrast simply did not accord with their opponents
fighting methods. No benefit accrued by massing artillery to carry out a bombardment of an
enemy who seldom concentrated in large numbers and who dispersed at will, reforming
elsewhere for the next ambush or raid. Soviet conscripts and reservists could dismount from a
personnel carrier and deploy rapidly for the purpose of laying down suppressive fire on an
enemy unit or sub-unit of like composition, but the tactics and standard battle drills of the
typical motorized rifle regiment failed to match the attacks of a highly mobile, fluid enemy
who refused to fight on terms consistent with Soviet doctrine. Air assault and Spetsnaz forces
learned to adapt their tactics to meet the demands of a guerrilla war, and in this regard they
achieved some success. But the level of innovation required to defeat such a wide-scale
insurgency proved beyond the means of Soviet forces as a whole, and thus must be seen as
one amongst many factors which doomed them to ultimate failure.
[Officer Cadets are advised that sections on Iraq and Afghanistan are in preparation, but that
in the meantime they may consult sources on these subjects from the suggested list which
follows. Current COIN doctrine is comprehensively covered in AFM Countering Insurgency,
which constitutes core reading:

203

United Kingdom. Ministry of Defence. Countering insurgency: Army Field Manual, Vol.
1 Pt. 10 (AC71876), London: Ministry of Defence, 2010.

Selected Reading on Insurgency and Counterinsurgency

General Historical

Beckett, Ian F. W. Modern insurgencies and counter-insurgencies: guerrillas and
their opponents since 1750. London: Routledge, 2001.
Beckett, Ian F.W., ed. The roots of counter-insurgency: armies and guerrilla
warfare, 1900-1945. London: Blandford, 1988.
Joes, Anthony James. Resisting rebellion: the history and politics of
counterinsurgency. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 2004.
Marks, Thomas A. Maoist insurgency since Vietnam. London: Frank Cass, 1996.

Marston, Daniel and Malkasian, Carter, eds. Counterinsurgency in modern
warfare. Oxford: Osprey, 2008.
Nagl, John A. Learning to eat soup with a knife: counterinsurgency lessons from
Malaya and Vietnam. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2002.

Theory, Concepts and Doctrine
Angstrom, Jan and Isabelle Duyvesetyn, Isabelle, eds. Modern war and the utility of force:
challenges, methods, strategy, London: Routledge, 2010.

Benbow, Tim, & Thornton, Rod, eds. Dimensions of counter-insurgency: applying
experience to practice. London: Routledge, 2008.
204

Connable, Ben and Libicki, Martin C. How insurgencies end. Santa Monica CA: Rand
Corporation, 2010.
Galula, David. Counterinsurgency warfare: theory and practice. Westport, CT:
Praeger, 2006 [originally published 1964].
Joes, Anthony James. Urban guerrilla warfare. Lexington, KY: University Press of
Kentucky, 2007.
Kilcullen, David. The accidental guerrilla: fighting small wars in the midst of big
ones. London: Hurst, 2010.

Kilcullen, David. Counterinsurgency. London: Hurst, 2010.
Rid, Thomas and Keaney, Thomas, eds. Understanding counterinsurgency
warfare: doctrine, operations, challenges. Abingdon: Routledge, 2010.
United Kingdom. Ministry of Defence. Countering insurgency: Army Field Manual, Vol.
1 Pt. 10 (AC71876), London: Ministry of Defence, 2010.
United States. Department of the Army. U.S. Army Field Manual 3-24: The U.S.
Army/Marine Corps counterinsurgency field manual. Chicago, IL: Chicago University
Press,
2007.
United States. Marine Corps. Small-unit leaders guide to counterinsurgency. USMC
Combat Development Command, 2006.

Insurgency and COIN theorists and practitioners (historical)

Guevara, Che [Ernesto]. Guerrilla warfare. University of Nebraska Press, 1985.

Kitson, Frank. Low intensity operations: subversion, insurgency & peacekeeping.
London: Faber and Faber, 1971.
Mao Tse Tung. On guerrilla warfare. University of Illinois Press [2nd rev. ed.].

Marighella, Carlos. For the liberation of Brazil. London: Penguin, 1974.
203

Thompson, Robert. Defeating Communist insurgency: the lessons of Malaya and
Vietnam. London: Chatto and Windus, 1966.

COIN and Insurgency contemporary and historical case studies

Braithwaite, Rodric. Afgantsty: The Russians in Afghanistan, 1979-89. New York: Profile
Books, 2012.

Caraccilo, Dominic and Thompson, Andrea. Achieving victory in Iraq: countering an
insurgency. Mechanicsburg, PA: Stackpole Books, 2008.
Clarke, Michael, ed. War without consequences: Iraqs insurgency and the spectre
of strategic defeat. London: RUSI, 2008.

Cordesman, Anthony. The Afghanistan campaign: can we win? Washington DC:
CSIS, 2009.
Cordesman, Anthony and Davies, Emma R. Iraqs insurgency and the road to civil
conflict. 2 vols. Washington DC: CSIS, 2008.
Edwards, Aaron. The Northern Ireland Troubles. Oxford: Osprey Publishing, 2011.
Evans, Martin. Algeria: Frances Undeclared War. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2011.
Flynn, Matthew J. Contesting history: the Bush counterinsurgency legacy in Iraq.
Praeger, 2010.
Fremont-Barnes, Gregory. The Soviet-Afghan War, 1979-89. Oxford: Osprey Publishing,
2012.
Hashim, Ahmed. Iraqs Sunni insurgency. London: Routledge/IISS, 2009.
Horne, Alistair. A Savage War of Peace, 1954-62. New York: New York Review of Books,
2006.
Jones, Seth. Counterinsurgency in Afghanistan. Santa Monica CA: Rand
Corporation, 2008.
Jones, Seth. In the graveyard of empires: Americas war with Afghanistan. New
York: Norton, 2009.
206

Ledwidge, Frank. Losing Small Wars: British Military Failure in Iraq and Afghanistan. New
Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2012.

McKittrick, David and McVea, David. Making Sense of the Troubles: A History of the
Northern Ireland Conflict. London: Penguin, 2012.

Mockaitis, Thomas R. Iraq and the challenge of counterinsurgency. Westport, CT:
Praeger Security International, 2008.
Ricks, Thomas. The gamble: General Petraeus and the untold story of the American
surge in Iraq, 2006-2008. London: Allen Lane, 2009.
Newsinger, John. British counter-insurgency from Palestine to Northern Ireland.
Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2002.
Strachan, Hew, ed. Big wars and small wars: the British Army and the lessons of
war in the 20th century. London: Routledge, 2006.

WS Handbook

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

WS Handbook

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

1

War Studies Commissioning Course Handbook

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi